[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025158656A1 - Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station - Google Patents

Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Info

Publication number
WO2025158656A1
WO2025158656A1 PCT/JP2024/002480 JP2024002480W WO2025158656A1 WO 2025158656 A1 WO2025158656 A1 WO 2025158656A1 JP 2024002480 W JP2024002480 W JP 2024002480W WO 2025158656 A1 WO2025158656 A1 WO 2025158656A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
srs
information
reception
unit
transmission
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2024/002480
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
尚哉 芝池
祐輝 松村
聡 永田
ジン ワン
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
NTT Docomo Inc
Original Assignee
NTT Docomo Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by NTT Docomo Inc filed Critical NTT Docomo Inc
Priority to PCT/JP2024/002480 priority Critical patent/WO2025158656A1/en
Publication of WO2025158656A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025158656A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0457Variable allocation of band or rate
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 3GPP Rel. 10-14 LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified with the aim of achieving even greater capacity and sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8 and 9).
  • LTE 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G+ 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • NR New Radio
  • HetNets Heterogeneous Networks
  • one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, wireless communication method, and base station that can appropriately perform UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs.
  • a terminal is characterized by having a receiving unit that receives setting information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) that is set to a specific purpose for use in managing an uplink (UL) beam to an uplink (UL) receiving point, and a control unit that determines a UL beam for the UL receiving point based on a specified rule or transmitted instructions.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • UL beam management can be properly performed for UL receiving points/micro BSs.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a general arrangement of transmission and reception points
  • FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a high-density UL arrangement
  • Figure 2 shows an example of DL/UL coverage of a Heterogeneous Network (HetNet).
  • HetNet Heterogeneous Network
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of option 1-2 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing examples of options 1-3 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing examples of options 1-4 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the SRS resource set indication field of option 1'-1 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the SRS resource set indication field of option 1'-1 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a general arrangement of transmission and reception points
  • FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a high-density
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.
  • a terminal (user terminal, User Equipment (UE)) may receive information (SRS configuration information, for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config") used to transmit a measurement reference signal (e.g., a sounding reference signal (SRS)).
  • SRS configuration information for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config"
  • SRS-Config parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config”
  • the UE may receive at least one of information regarding one or more SRS resource sets (SRS resource set information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet”) and information regarding one or more SRS resources (SRS resource information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource”).
  • SRS resource set information e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet
  • SRS resource information e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource”
  • An SRS resource set may be associated with (or group together) a predetermined number of SRS resources.
  • Each SRS resource may be identified by an SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) or SRS Resource Identifier (ID).
  • SRI SRS Resource Indicator
  • ID SRS Resource Identifier
  • the SRS resource set information may include the SRS resource set ID (SRS-ResourceSetId), a list of SRS resource IDs (SRS-ResourceId) used in the resource set, the SRS resource type, and SRS usage information.
  • the SRS resource type may indicate either periodic SRS (P-SRS), semi-persistent SRS (SP-SRS), or aperiodic CSI (Aperiodic SRS (A-SRS)).
  • P-SRS periodic SRS
  • SP-SRS semi-persistent SRS
  • A-SRS aperiodic CSI
  • the UE may transmit P-SRS and SP-SRS periodically (or periodically after activation) and transmit A-SRS based on an SRS request in the DCI.
  • RRC parameter "usage", L1 (Layer-1) parameter "SRS-SetUse" may be, for example, beam management, codebook (CB), non-codebook (NCB), antenna switching, etc.
  • An SRS for codebook or non-codebook use may be used to determine a precoder for codebook-based or non-codebook-based uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) transmission based on the SRI.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the UE may determine the precoder (precoding matrix) for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, the Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI), and the Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI).
  • the UE may determine the precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.
  • the SRS resource information may include an SRS resource ID (SRS-ResourceId), the number of SRS ports, the SRS port number, the transmission comb, SRS resource mapping (e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.), hopping-related information, an SRS resource type, a sequence ID, spatial relationship information of the SRS, etc.
  • SRS resource ID SRS resource ID
  • SRS resource mapping e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.
  • hopping-related information e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.
  • SRS resource type e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.
  • sequence ID e
  • the spatial relationship information of the SRS may indicate spatial relationship information between a predetermined reference signal and the SRS.
  • the predetermined reference signal may be at least one of a Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel (SS/PBCH) block, a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS), and an SRS (e.g., another SRS).
  • SS/PBCH Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • SRS e.g., another SRS.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB).
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • the spatial relationship information for the SRS may include at least one of an SSB index, a CSI-RS resource ID, and an SRS resource ID as an index for the predetermined reference signal.
  • the SSB index, SSB resource ID, and SSB Resource Indicator may be interchangeable.
  • the CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource ID, and CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI) may be interchangeable.
  • the SRS index, SRS resource ID, and SRI may be interchangeable.
  • the spatial relationship information of the SRS may include a serving cell index, a BWP index (BWP ID), etc. corresponding to the above-mentioned specified reference signal.
  • the UE may transmit the SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter used to receive the SSB or CSI-RS.
  • the UE may assume that the UE receive beam for the SSB or CSI-RS and the UE transmit beam for the SRS are the same.
  • the UE may transmit the target SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) used to transmit the reference SRS.
  • the UE may assume that the UE transmit beam for the reference SRS and the UE transmit beam for the target SRS are the same.
  • the UE may determine the spatial relationship of the PUSCH scheduled by a DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1) based on the value of a predetermined field (e.g., the SRS resource identifier (SRI) field) in the DCI. Specifically, the UE may use spatial relationship information (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") of the SRS resources determined based on the value of the predetermined field (e.g., the SRI) for PUSCH transmission.
  • a predetermined field e.g., the SRS resource identifier (SRI) field
  • the UE when codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with an SRS resource set for the codebook with up to two SRS resources, and one of the up to two SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (a 1-bit SRI field).
  • DCI a 1-bit SRI field
  • the transmission beam for PUSCH is specified by the SRI field.
  • the UE may determine the TPMI and number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the precoding information and number of layers field (hereinafter also referred to as the precoding information field).
  • the UE may select a precoder based on the TPMI, number of layers, etc. from an uplink codebook for the same number of SRS ports as indicated by the upper layer parameter "nrofSRS-Ports" configured for the SRS resource specified by the SRI field.
  • the UE when non-codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a non-codebook-used SRS resource set having up to four SRS resources, and one or more of the up to four SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (2-bit SRI field).
  • the UE may determine the number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the SRI field. For example, the UE may determine that the number of SRS resources specified by the SRI field is the same as the number of layers for the PUSCH. The UE may also calculate a precoder for the SRS resources.
  • the transmission beam for the PUSCH may be calculated based on (measurements of) the configured associated CSI-RS. Otherwise, the transmission beam for the PUSCH may be specified by the SRI.
  • the UE may be configured to use codebook-based PUSCH transmission or non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission using the higher layer parameter "txConfig,” which indicates the transmission scheme.
  • This parameter may indicate the value "codebook” or "non-codebook.”
  • codebook-based PUSCH (codebook-based PUSCH transmission, codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme for the UE.
  • non-codebook-based PUSCH (non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission, non-codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "non-codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme for the UE.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication state
  • TCI states may refer to those that apply to downlink signals/channels.
  • the equivalent of TCI states that apply to uplink signals/channels may be expressed as spatial relations.
  • TCI status is information about the quasi-co-location (QCL) of signals/channels, and may also be called spatial reception parameters, spatial relation information, etc.
  • the TCI status may be set in the UE for each channel or signal.
  • QCL is an index that indicates the statistical properties of a signal/channel. For example, if a signal/channel has a QCL relationship with another signal/channel, it may mean that it can be assumed that at least one of the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial parameters (e.g., spatial Rx parameters) is the same between these different signals/channels (i.e., they have QCL with respect to at least one of these).
  • the spatial reception parameters may correspond to the reception beam of the UE (e.g., a reception analog beam), and the beam may be identified based on the spatial QCL.
  • the QCL (or at least one element of the QCL) may be interpreted as sQCL (spatial QCL).
  • QCL types A plurality of types (QCL types) of QCL may be defined. For example, four QCL types A to D may be provided, each having different parameters (or parameter sets) that can be assumed to be the same.
  • the parameters (which may be referred to as QCL parameters) are as follows: QCL Type A (QCL-A): Doppler shift, Doppler spread, mean delay and delay spread, QCL Type B (QCL-B): Doppler shift and Doppler spread, QCL Type C (QCL-C): Doppler shift and mean delay, QCL Type D (QCL-D): Spatial reception parameters.
  • the UE's assumption that a Control Resource Set (CORESET), channel, or reference signal has a specific QCL (e.g., QCL type D) relationship with another CORESET, channel, or reference signal may be referred to as a QCL assumption.
  • CORESET Control Resource Set
  • QCL QCL type D
  • the UE may determine at least one of the transmit beam (Tx beam) and receive beam (Rx beam) for a signal/channel based on the TCI condition or QCL assumption of the signal/channel.
  • the TCI state may be, for example, information regarding the QCL between the target channel (in other words, the reference signal (RS) for that channel) and another signal (e.g., another RS).
  • the TCI state may be set (indicated) by higher layer signaling, physical layer signaling, or a combination of these.
  • target channel/RS target channel/reference signal
  • reference RS reference signal
  • source RS source RS
  • the channel for which the TCI state or spatial relationship is set (specified) may be, for example, at least one of the following: a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)), and an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)).
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • the RS that has a QCL relationship with the channel may be, for example, at least one of a synchronization signal block (SSB), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a sounding reference signal (SRS), a tracking CSI-RS (also called a tracking reference signal (TRS)), a QCL detection reference signal (also called a QRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc.
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • TRS tracking reference signal
  • QRS QCL detection reference signal
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • An SSB is a signal block that includes at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • An SSB may also be referred to as an SS/PBCH block.
  • An RS of QCL type X in a TCI state may refer to an RS that has a QCL type X relationship with a certain channel/signal (DMRS), and this RS may be called a QCL source of QCL type X in that TCI state.
  • DMRS channel/signal
  • FIG. 1A shows an example of a typical transmission/reception point arrangement.
  • a UE receives a DL signal from a transmission/reception point (TRP) and transmits a UL signal to that TRP.
  • TRP transmission/reception point
  • the UE and TRP are far apart, there may be significant path loss, resulting in a decrease in communication quality.
  • FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a high-density UL deployment.
  • a UE receives DL signals from a DL transmission point (TRP/Central TRP/DL TRP/Macro TRP) corresponding to a macro cell, and transmits UL signals to a UL reception point (e.g., a reception point with smaller path loss/reception power).
  • a DL transmission point TRP/Central TRP/DL TRP/Macro TRP
  • the UE may also be capable of performing UL transmission to a DL transmission point.
  • HetNet Heterogeneous Network
  • DL TRP macro Base Station
  • UL TRP UL TRP
  • the transmission power of the macro BS and the micro BS is different.
  • the optimal DL coverage and the optimal UL coverage are different.
  • the DL coverage is determined by the RSRP
  • the UL coverage is determined by the path loss (PL).
  • the UE is included in the optimal DL coverage of the macro BS and the optimal UL coverage of the micro BS.
  • the UE can receive DL from the macro BS and transmit UL to the micro BS.
  • the UE may transmit some reference signals/channels (e.g., SRS with Antenna Switching (AS) usage, used to acquire DL CSI) to the macro BS. Therefore, the UE may require two Timing Advances (TAs) in this scenario.
  • the AS SRS is transmitted to the macro BS because it allows the base station (macro BS) to measure DL CSI (e.g., determine the DL MIMO precoder) based on the SRS reception using channel reciprocity.
  • the Codebook/Non-codebook SRS is transmitted to the micro BS because it is used for PUSCH precoder/beam determination.
  • a micro BS Even if a micro BS has DL transmission capability, it can save energy by turning off DL most of the time.
  • the functionality of the micro BS is similar to that of a UL-only TRP (UL Reception Point).
  • SRS whose usage is beam management
  • Rel. 15 and later support the use of SRS for beam management, which is independent of DL RSs.
  • the spatial relationship/TCI status of the beam management SRS is dependent on the UE implementation. For example, even for the same SRS resource ID within a periodic SRS resource set, the spatial relationship/TCI status may change. This feature can also be used to obtain better beam correspondence with DL-RSs. Therefore, applying conventional beam management to the UL receiving point may result in inappropriate UL beam management.
  • the inventors therefore came up with a wireless communication method that can properly perform UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs.
  • a word enclosed in "( )" in a sentence may indicate an explanation of the word immediately preceding it (for example, an explanation of spelling), a paraphrase, a specific example, a supplementary explanation, etc.
  • a word enclosed in "[ ]" in a sentence may be interpreted including the word in the meaning of the entire sentence, or may be interpreted excluding the word in the meaning of the entire sentence (ignoring the word in the meaning of the entire sentence). Note that "( )" and "[ ]” may also be used for purposes/meanings other than those mentioned above.
  • A/B and “at least one of A and B” may be interpreted interchangeably. Also, in this disclosure, “A/B/C” may mean “at least one of A, B, and C.”
  • Radio Resource Control RRC
  • RRC parameters RRC parameters
  • RRC messages upper layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc.
  • IEs information elements
  • CEs Medium Access Control control elements
  • update commands activation/deactivation commands, etc.
  • higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocol (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • LPP LTE Positioning Protocol
  • MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc.
  • Broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • RMSI Remaining Minimum System Information
  • OSI Other System Information
  • physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • TRI
  • the UL reception point may be connected to a TRP (e.g., a base station) or a core network via wired or wireless connections.
  • the UL reception point may be treated as a network (NW) or a base station.
  • the UL reception point may be capable of transmitting downlink (DL) signals (e.g., PL values) and may be applied to base stations that form a macrocell. For example, the UL reception point may not transmit downlink data, but may transmit control signals/channels.
  • DL downlink
  • PL values downlink control signals/channels.
  • the terms base station, TRP, UL receiving point, UL TRP, UL only TRP, micro cell, micro BS, and micro TRP may be interchangeable.
  • An UL receiving point primarily performs UL reception.
  • An UL receiving point may perform only UL reception, or may perform UL reception and DL transmission.
  • the terms base station, TRP, DL transmission point, DL TRP, DL only TRP, UL/DL TRP, macro cell, macro BS, macro TRP, and central TRP may be interchangeable.
  • a DL transmission point primarily performs DL transmission.
  • a DL transmission point may perform only DL transmission, or may perform UL reception and DL transmission.
  • UL high density deployment distributed TRP mode, separated location mode of transmitting/receiving points, distributed transmitting/receiving mode, separated TRP mode, TRP type 1, TRP type 2, TRP type A, and TRP type B may be read interchangeably.
  • This disclosure may be based on at least one of single TRP, multi-TRP with multi-DCI, multi-TRP with single DCI, Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 above.
  • UL beam management for UL reception points will be mainly described, but the same may also be applied to UL beam management for the micro BS in Figure 2.
  • UL beam management, UL beam sweeping, and UL beam determination/selection may be read interchangeably.
  • the UE may receive configuration information (e.g., SRS-Config) for an SRS configured for a specific usage, used for UL beam management to a UL reception point, from a DL transmission point or a UL reception point.
  • the UE may control SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the configuration information.
  • the specific usage (new usage) may be a usage different from conventional beam management, CB, NCB, and antenna switching. This allows the gNB/NW to distinguish the SRS for UL beam management to a UL reception point from other usages.
  • the number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the new application may be set. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied as the number of SRS resource sets: Option 1-1: Maximum 1. Option 1-2: Maximum of 2. In this case, different SRS resource sets may correspond to different UE antenna panels. Option 1-3: 3 or more (e.g., 8).
  • the number of SRS resources for each SRS resource set corresponding to the new application may be configured. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied as the number of SRS resources for each SRS resource set: Option 2-1: Maximum 1. Option 2-2: Maximum two. Option 2-3: Three or more.
  • the limit on the number of SRS resources per set may also be different.
  • Option 3 For the SRS resource/resource set corresponding to the new application, for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
  • Option 3-1 The UE may transmit different SRS resources in the same beam in different SRS resource sets.
  • the gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between the different SRS resources.
  • the different SRS resource sets may refer to SRS resource sets transmitted at different periods when a certain SRS resource set is transmitted periodically or semi-persistently.
  • Option 3-2 The UE may transmit different SRS resources in the same SRS resource set on the same beam, and the gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between the different SRS resources.
  • Option 3-3 The UE may perform different repeated transmissions of the same SRS resource on the same beam.
  • the gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between different SRS resources.
  • Option 4 The new application may be used in combination with the existing application. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied: Option 4-1: UL beam management for UL reception points and UL beam management for DL TRPs (application "beam management”) may be applied in combination, or a new application may indicate both UL beam management for UL reception points and UL beam management for DL TRPs.
  • Option 4-2 UL beam management for the UL reception point and CSI for the CB PUSCH (application "codebook”) may be applied in combination, or a new application may indicate both UL beam management for the UL reception point and CSI for the CB PUSCH (application "codebook").
  • Option 4-3 UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for NCB PUSCH (use “noncodebook”) may be applied in combination, or a new use may indicate both UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for NCB PUSCH (use “noncodebook”).
  • the UE may receive a new indication to indicate that the legacy use is for an UL reception point in addition to the legacy use (beam management, CB, NCB, or antenna switching). For example, a flag (e.g., Flag_UL TRP) indicating whether the legacy use is for an UL reception point may be indicated. Alternatively, another parameter (e.g., Timing Advance Group (TAG) ID) that implicitly indicates whether the legacy use is for an UL reception point may be used. This flag/parameter may be indicated per SRS configuration, per SRS resource set, or per SRS resource.
  • TAG Timing Advance Group
  • the UE appropriately controls SRS transmission to an UL reception point based on the specific application corresponding to the UL reception point.
  • the UE may use codebook (CB) SRS transmission (SRS transmission with CB as its purpose) for UL beam management for UL reception points.
  • CB codebook
  • the UE may control SRS transmission for UL reception points and perform beam management for the UL reception points. In this case, the total amount of UL resources required for SRS transmission can be reduced.
  • Option 1-1 Maximum of 1.
  • the SRS resource set may be configured to include multiple SRS resources.
  • each of the two SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point.
  • Figure 3 shows an example of option 1-2 of the second embodiment.
  • SRS resource set #0 may correspond to a macro TRP, and SRS resource set #1 may correspond to a UL reception point.
  • SRS resource set #0 may correspond to UL panel 1, and SRS resource set #1 may correspond to UL panel 2.
  • each of the three SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point.
  • the three SRS resource sets may correspond to a macro TRP and its corresponding UE panel, another macro TRP and its corresponding UE panel, or an UL reception point and its corresponding UE panel, respectively.
  • Figure 4 shows examples of options 1-3 of the second embodiment.
  • SRS resource set #0 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 1
  • SRS resource set #1 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 2
  • SRS resource set #2 may correspond to the UL reception point (and UE panel 1 or 2).
  • each of the three SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point.
  • Figure 5 shows examples of options 1-4 of the second embodiment.
  • SRS resource set #0 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 1
  • SRS resource set #1 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 2
  • SRS resource set #2 may correspond to the UL reception point and UE panel 1
  • SRS resource set #3 may correspond to the UL reception point and UE panel 2.
  • Options 1-5 Maximum X (e.g., X ⁇ 5).
  • Option 1-5-1 Fixed value (e.g. 5, 6, 8, etc.) Fixed values may be defined.
  • Option 1-5-2 The number is set by RRC signaling.
  • Option 1-5-3 The number is indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI.
  • Option 1-5-4 A combination of these. For example, the number may be indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI from a list set by the specifications/RRC signaling.
  • Option 1'-1 For the SRS resource set indicator field, an existing field may be applied, or new bits (additional bits) corresponding to UL reception points may be applied.
  • Option 1'-2 An additional field may be applied indicating whether it is a macro TRP or a UL reception point.
  • Figure 6 shows a first example of the SRS resource set indication field for option 1'-1 of the second embodiment.
  • four code points using the existing two bits are applied.
  • code point 2 indicates the application of a UL reception point (UL-only TRP).
  • Figure 7 shows a second example of the SRS resource set indication field for option 1'-1 of the second embodiment.
  • eight code points using three bits are applied.
  • code points 4 to 7 indicate the application of UL reception points (UL-only TRPs).
  • Option 2>> Regarding the number of SRS resources per SRS resource set (for UL beam management), for example, at least one of the following options may be applied: Option 2-1: Maximum 2. Option 2-2: Maximum 4. Option 2-3: Maximum 8. Options 2-4: Max X. Option 2-4-1: Fixed value (e.g. 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, etc.). Option 2-4-2: The number is set by RRC signaling. Option 2-4-3: The number is indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI. Option 2-4-4: A combination of these. For example, the number may be indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI from a list set by the specifications/RRC signaling.
  • examples 1 and 2 below may be applied.
  • example 3 below may be applied.
  • Example 1 A total of 8 resources are configured. 6 of the 8 resources are used for UL beam management. The remaining 2 resources are used in the same way as Rel. 15 CB PUSCH transmission.
  • Example 2 A total of 8 resources are configured. 4 of the 8 resources are used for UL beam management. The remaining 4 resources are used for Rel. 16 UL full power MIMO transmit mode 2 functionality.
  • Example 3 A total of 16 resources are configured. The resources are divided into multiple groups, each corresponding to one TRP and containing four resources. The four resources in each group are used for UL full power MIMO transmission mode 2 function.
  • the bit width of the SRI field may be extended (e.g., to 4 bits), thereby indicating increased SRS resources.
  • Option 3 With respect to one or more SRS resources/SRS resource sets to be configured, for example, at least one of the following options may apply: Option 3-1: The same RE is set. Option 3-2: The same/different OFDM symbols are set within a slot. Option 3-3: Same/different cyclic shifts are set. Option 3-4: The same/different TCI conditions (QCL assumptions) are set.
  • Options 3-1 to 3-4 may be applied to some of the configured SRS resources/SRS resource sets (not all configured resources/resource sets), or to all SRS resources/SRS resource sets.
  • the UE may determine a beam for each SRS resource for UL beam management to the UL reception point.
  • beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed using the conventional application "codebook,” so beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed appropriately without changing the application specifications.
  • the UE may use non-codebook (NCB) SRS transmission (SRS transmission with NCB as its purpose) for UL beam management for UL reception points.
  • NNB non-codebook
  • the UE may control SRS transmission for UL reception points and perform beam management for the UL reception points. In this case, the total amount of UL resources required for SRS transmission can be reduced.
  • At least one of the options in option 1 of the second embodiment may be applied.
  • the "4" in options 2-1 and 2-2 may refer to the maximum MIMO layer for non-codebook PUSCH transmission by the UE.
  • the "4" in options 2-1 and 2-2 may be replaced with another number (e.g., 8).
  • N may refer to the number of resource groups for SRS resource configuration within an SRS resource set. Whether simultaneous transmission is possible for multiple SRS resources, and if so, the maximum number of possible simultaneous transmissions, may be determined for all resources or for each resource group.
  • Option 3 For one or more SRS resources/SRS resource sets to be configured, at least one of the options in option 3 of the second embodiment may be applied.
  • beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed using the conventional application "codebook,” so beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed appropriately without changing the application specifications.
  • ⁇ Fourth embodiment> The following describes UL beam management for a UL reception point. Regarding the determination of the UE's beam (UL beam) for a UL reception point, at least one of the following options may be applied: The fourth embodiment may be implemented, for example, when a specific application shown in the first to third embodiments is set.
  • the UE may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule. At least one of the following options may be applied: Option 2-1: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a different beam than the beam for the macro TRP. Option 2-2: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a beam pointing in a specific direction. Option 2-3: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a beam in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.
  • EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
  • rules based on beam directivity may be applied to the UL beam.
  • a beam/TCI state/spatial relationship that points in a direction 180 degrees different from the direction toward the macro TRP may be applied to the UL beam.
  • Option 3 The UE may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on the configuration/instruction sent from the NW. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied: Option 3-1: The UE may determine the UL beam based on received RRC signaling. Option 3-2: The UE may determine the UL beam based on the received DL MAC CE. Option 3-3: The UE may determine the UL beam based on the received DCI.
  • the UE may receive the configuration of multiple UL beams via RRC signaling, receive a MAC CE/DCI that activates/indicates one of the multiple UL beams, and determine the activated/indicated UL beam as the UL beam for the UL reception point.
  • the Rel. 17/Rel. 18 unified TCI state framework for UL beams may be applied.
  • the UE may apply the configured/indicated unified TCI state to the beam for the UL reception point.
  • Option 4 As conditions/restrictions set for UL beam management to a UL reception point, at least one of the following options may be applied:
  • Option 4-1 No followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship is configured for the SRS resources configured for UL beam management to the UL reception point. This option may mean that the SRS beam resulting from beam management at the UL reception point is up to the UE implementation. This option may also be applied when different SRS resources are configured between the conventional SRS and the extended SRS of this disclosure.
  • Option 4-2 The followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship is configured for the SRS resources configured for UL beam management to the UL reception point. In this case, the configured followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship may be ignored. This option may mean that the SRS beam due to beam management of the UL reception point is up to the UE implementation.
  • followUnifiedTCI-State may be read as followUnifiedTCI-StateSRS.
  • followUnifiedTCI-State is an RRC parameter, and when set to enabled, the UE may apply the indicated DL-dedicated TCI or joint TCI when receiving PDCCH in the corresponding CORESET.
  • followUnifiedTCI-StateSRS is an RRC parameter that, when set to enabled, allows the UE to apply the indicated DL-dedicated TCI or joint TCI for the SRS resource set.
  • This parameter may be set for aperiodic SRS for beam management, or for SRS for any time-domain operation such as codebook, non-codebook, and antenna switching.
  • the UE can more easily or more efficiently identify an appropriate beam for the UL reception point.
  • the UE may switch on and off UL beam management for the UL reception point, which can suppress a decrease in throughput when, for example, the distance to the UL reception point changes due to the movement of the UE.
  • the NW base station decides to switch on/off UL beam management for the UL reception point. Then, the UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch from the NW and perform the switch on/off of UL beam management based on the configuration/instruction. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
  • the UE may receive the configuration/indication indicating the switch in at least one of the following ways:
  • Option 1-1 The UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch via RRC signaling.
  • Option 1-2 The UE may receive a configuration/indication indicating the switchover via the DL MAC CE.
  • Option 1-3 The UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch via DCI.
  • the settings/instructions sent from the NW to the UE may include at least one of the following: Option 2-1: Whether to turn on/off UL beam management for the UL receiving point.
  • Option 2-2 Beam information for UL beam sweeping.
  • the timing/conditions under which the UE switches on/off UL beam management for an UL reception point may be at least one of the following:
  • Option 3-1 After receiving a setting/instruction from the network (for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since receiving the setting/instruction).
  • Option 3-2 After transmitting HARQ ACK in response to receiving a setting/instruction from the network (e.g., after a predetermined period of time after reception).
  • the specified period for options 3-1 and 3-2 may be defined as a specific number of slots or a specific number of symbols.
  • the legacy CB, the legacy NCB, the new CB, and the new NCB may be individually configured in the SRS resource set.
  • txConfig may also be configured with at least one of a CB corresponding to a UL reception point (e.g., codebook-RxonlyTRP) and an NCB corresponding to a UL reception point (e.g., nonCodebook-RxonlyTRP).
  • a CB corresponding to a UL reception point e.g., codebook-RxonlyTRP
  • an NCB corresponding to a UL reception point e.g., nonCodebook-RxonlyTRP
  • the operation of the second embodiment may be performed.
  • the operation of the second embodiment may be performed.
  • the operation of a conventional CB PUSCH may be performed.
  • the operation of a conventional NCB PUSCH may be performed.
  • the existing CB/NCB settings for SRS may be applied for UL beam sweeping to the UL reception point.
  • the operation of the second embodiment/third embodiment may be applied.
  • the legacy CB and NCB for the SRS resource set may be configured separately.
  • a specific RRC parameter e.g., withRxOnlyTRP
  • the UE may transmit the CB SRS or the NCB SRS, taking into account UL beam sweeping for the UL reception point (e.g., operation of the second/third embodiment).
  • the specific RRC parameter is not configured, the UE may transmit the conventional CB SRS or the NCB SRS.
  • the UE may receive a MAC CE/DCI instructing dynamic switching between legacy UL beam management and enhanced UL beam management for the UL reception point, and may perform the dynamic switching.
  • Switching to (applying) legacy UL beam management may mean that UL beam management for the UL reception point is turned off.
  • Example 1 When dynamic switching occurs (e.g., when switching to legacy UL beam management), the UE may ignore SRS resources with larger SRS resource IDs and only consider an appropriate number of SRS resources (e.g., two).
  • Example 2 When dynamic switching is performed (e.g., when switching to UL beam management for a UL reception point), the UE may transmit SRS on all SRS resources configured for the corresponding SRS resource set.
  • Example 3 When dynamic switching is performed, the UE may transmit SRS on any of the SRS resources configured for the corresponding SRS resource set.
  • Switching UL beam management on and off for a UL reception point may be triggered by the UE.
  • Option 1-1 The UE may perform switching based on the reception result (e.g., RSRP) of the RS (e.g., SSB (SS/PBCH)). For example, the UE may turn on UL beam management for the UL reception point if the RSRP of the SSB/CSI-RS from the DL transmission point is below a threshold. For example, the UE may turn off UL beam management for the UL reception point if the RSRP of the SSB/CSI-RS from the UL reception point is below a threshold.
  • Option 1-2 The UE may perform switching based on the reception results (e.g., RSRP) of another DL signal/channel (e.g., TRS/CSI-RS).
  • applying legacy operations of CB/NCB SRS transmission may mean that the number of SRS resource sets/number of SRS resources is at least one of the following: The number of SRS resource sets is up to 1 (Rel. 15) or up to 2 (Rel. 16 and later). The number of SRS resource sets may correspond to the number of UE panels. The number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is up to 2 (Rel. 15) or up to 4 (Rel. 16 and later, for UEs supporting full power MIMO mode 2) for CB SRS. The number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is up to 4 (Rel. 15) or up to 8 (Rel. 18 and later, for UEs supporting 8 transmissions (antenna ports)) for NCB SRS.
  • the number of SRS resource sets/number of SRS resources is at least one of the following: The number of SRS resource sets is up to 1 (Rel. 15) or up to 2 (Rel. 16 and later). The number of SRS resource sets may correspond to the number of
  • UL beam management for UL reception points can be easily switched on and off in response to changes in UE movement, the communication environment, etc. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in communication throughput.
  • any information may be notified to the UE [from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS)] (in other words, the UE receives any information from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.
  • NW network
  • BS base station
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
  • LCID Logical Channel ID
  • the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • notification of any information to the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • notification of any information from the UE [to the NW] may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), specific signals/channels (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals), or a combination thereof.
  • physical layer signaling e.g., UCI
  • higher layer signaling e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE
  • specific signals/channels e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals
  • the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.
  • the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • any information notification from the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.
  • the specific process/operation/control/assumption/information(s) of at least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied (used) when one or more of the following conditions are met: - Upper layer parameters indicating the specific processing/operation/control/assumption/information are set; The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on relevant higher layer parameters; The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is specified/activated/triggered by MAC CE/DCI/UCI/resource/channel/RS, Reporting or supporting specific UE capabilities indicating (or relating to) the specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information; The application of the specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on specific conditions.
  • the specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following: - Supporting the above specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information; Supporting specific uses of SRS (for beam management for UL transmitting/receiving points); Supporting scenario 1 (UL dense deployment), Supporting Scenario 2 (HetNet), Supporting UL transmissions (SRS/PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH) to UL reception points; Number of supported UL reception points/DL transmission points.
  • the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities for each frequency (e.g., one or a combination of cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities for each frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities for each subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities for each Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC)).
  • FR1 Frequency Range 1
  • FR2 FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2
  • SCS subcarrier Spacing
  • FS Feature Set
  • FSPC Feature Set Per Component-carrier
  • the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that apply across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) or Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • the UE/BS may follow the behavior specified in existing 3GPP releases.
  • a receiving unit that receives configuration information of an SRS that is configured with a specific purpose used for UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point; a control unit that controls SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the setting information;
  • a terminal having: [Appendix 2] 2.
  • the control unit uses codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.
  • a terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the control unit uses non-codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.
  • a receiving unit that receives setting information of a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) having a specific purpose set for use in UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point; a control unit that determines an UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction;
  • a terminal having: [Appendix 2] The terminal described in Appendix 1, wherein the control unit determines, as the UL beam for the UL receiving point, a beam different from the beam for the macro TRP, a beam heading in a specific direction, or a beam heading in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.
  • wireless communication system The configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below.
  • communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination thereof.
  • FIG 8 is a diagram showing an example of the schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to one embodiment.
  • Wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that achieves communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • 5G NR 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio
  • the wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)).
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • RATs Radio Access Technologies
  • MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.
  • E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • EN-DC E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
  • NE-DC NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity
  • the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN).
  • the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.
  • the wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (for example, dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).
  • gNBs NR base stations
  • N-DC Dual Connectivity
  • the wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are located within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is smaller than the macrocell C1.
  • a user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The location, number, shape, size, etc. of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the configuration shown in the figure.
  • base stations 11 and 12 are not to be distinguished, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.
  • the wireless communication system 1 may also utilize multi-input multi-output (MIMO).
  • MIMO multi-input multi-output
  • one cell may be formed by one antenna/base station 10, or by multiple antennas/base stations 10.
  • One [virtual] cell (which may be called, for example, a supercell) may be made up of multiple [virtual] cells (which may be called, for example, subcells).
  • a supercell may correspond to a cell with a fixed physical range
  • a subcell may correspond to a cell with a quasi-static/dynamically changing physical range.
  • the wireless communication system 1 may be called a cell-free system.
  • the user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10.
  • the user terminal 20 may use at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • CC component carriers
  • DC dual connectivity
  • Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)).
  • Macrocell C1 may be included in FR1
  • small cell C2 may be included in FR2.
  • FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz)
  • FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.
  • the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of time division duplex (TDD) and frequency division duplex (FDD) in each CC.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • Multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication).
  • wire e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.
  • NR communication e.g., NR communication
  • base station 11 which corresponds to the upper station
  • base station 12 which corresponds to the relay station (relay)
  • IAB node Integrated Access Backhaul
  • a base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10.
  • the core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5GCN 5G Core Network
  • NGC Next Generation Core
  • the core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM).
  • NF Network Functions
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • AMF Access and Mobility management Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • DN Data Network
  • LMF Location Management Function
  • OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
  • the user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.
  • a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing may be used.
  • OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix OFDM
  • DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • the radio access method may also be called a waveform.
  • other radio access methods e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods
  • the downlink channel may be a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), or the like.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PDSCH User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • PUSCH User data, upper layer control information, etc.
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • Lower layer control information may be transmitted via the PDCCH.
  • the lower layer control information may include, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and PUSCH.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the DCI that schedules the PDSCH may be referred to as a DL assignment or DL DCI
  • the DCI that schedules the PUSCH may be referred to as a UL grant or UL DCI.
  • the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data
  • the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.
  • a control resource set (CORESET) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH.
  • the CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI.
  • the search space corresponds to the search area and search method for PDCCH candidates.
  • One CORESET may be associated with one or more search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a certain search space based on the search space configuration.
  • One search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels.
  • One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that in this disclosure, “search space,” “search space set,” “search space setting,” “search space set setting,” “CORESET,” “CORESET setting,” etc. may be read interchangeably.
  • the PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and scheduling request (SR).
  • UCI uplink control information
  • CSI channel state information
  • HARQ-ACK Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement
  • ACK/NACK ACK/NACK, etc.
  • SR scheduling request
  • the PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.
  • downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding the word "link.”
  • various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical" to the beginning.
  • a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.
  • the synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS).
  • a signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for the PBCH) may be referred to as an SS/PBCH block, an SS block (SSB), etc.
  • SS, SSB, etc. may also be referred to as a reference signal.
  • a sounding reference signal (SRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS).
  • DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).
  • the base station 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment.
  • the base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that the base station may include one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and it may be assumed that the base station 10 also has other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10.
  • the control unit 110 can be composed of a controller, a control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc.
  • the control unit 110 may also control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurements, etc.
  • the control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120.
  • the control unit 110 may also perform call processing of communication channels (setting up, releasing, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure relates.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit.
  • the transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122.
  • the receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.
  • the transmitting and receiving antenna 130 can be composed of an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver 120 may also receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver 120 may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • HARQ retransmission control e.g., HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the transceiver 120 may perform measurements on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.
  • the transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • devices included in the core network 30 e.g., network nodes providing NF
  • other base stations 10, etc. may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.
  • the transmitter and receiver of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 120, the transmitter/receiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.
  • the base station 10 may be separated into three elements: a radio unit (RU), a distributed unit (DU), and a central unit (CU).
  • the RU may perform RF processing (digital beamforming, digital-to-analog conversion, analog beamforming, etc.) and lower-level physical layer functions (precoding, IFFT, FFT, etc.).
  • the DU may perform higher-level physical layer functions (encoding to resource element mapping, etc.), MAC layer functions, and RLC layer functions.
  • the CU may perform PDCP layer, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and RRC layer functions.
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • the base station 10 may include a single device that implements all of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU, or may include multiple devices that each implement some of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU and are connected to each other.
  • the base station 10 may be interchangeably referred to as the RU/DU/CU.
  • the transceiver unit 120 may also transmit configuration information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) with a specific purpose set for use in uplink (UL) beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the control unit 110 may assume that SRS transmission to the UL reception point is controlled based on the setting information. If the base station 10 is an UL reception point, the transceiver unit 120 may receive the SRS.
  • the control unit 110 may assume that the UL beam for the UL reception point is determined based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction. If the base station 10 is the UL reception point, the transceiver unit 120 may receive an UL signal using that UL beam.
  • the user terminal 10 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment.
  • the user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the user terminal 20 may include one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230.
  • this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.
  • the control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20.
  • the control unit 210 can be composed of a controller, control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.
  • the control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc.
  • the control unit 210 may also control transmission and reception, measurement, etc. using the transmission and reception unit 220 and the transmission and reception antenna 230.
  • the control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals and transfer them to the transmission and reception unit 220.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field related to this disclosure.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit.
  • the transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222.
  • the receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.
  • the transmitting and receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may also transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.
  • digital beamforming e.g., precoding
  • analog beamforming e.g., phase rotation
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.
  • RLC layer processing e.g., RLC retransmission control
  • MAC layer processing e.g., HARQ retransmission control
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.
  • Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings for transform precoding. If transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the transmission processing to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform; if not, it may not be necessary to perform DFT processing as the transmission processing.
  • transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH)
  • the transceiver unit 220 transmission processing unit 2211
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal.
  • the measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc.
  • the measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.
  • the measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources.
  • the channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources.
  • the measurement unit 223 may also derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources.
  • the interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc.
  • CSI-IM may also be referred to as CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS.
  • CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be interchangeable.
  • the transmitter and receiver of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 220 and the transmitter/receiver antenna 230.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may also receive configuration information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) with a specific purpose set for use in uplink (UL) beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the control unit 210 may control SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the setting information.
  • the specific application may be an application other than beam management, codebook, non-codebook, and antenna switching.
  • the control unit 210 may use codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.
  • the control unit 210 may use non-codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.
  • the control unit 210 may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on specified rules or transmitted instructions.
  • the control unit 210 may determine, as the UL beam for the UL reception point, a beam different from the beam for the macro TRP, a beam directed in a specific direction, or a beam directed in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.
  • the transceiver unit 220 may receive a setting indicating whether UL beam management for the UL reception point is on or off.
  • the control unit 210 may switch the UL beam management on and off based on the setting indicating the switch.
  • the control unit 210 may switch UL beam management for the UL reception point on and off based on the reception result of the reference signal.
  • functions include, but are not limited to, judgment, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment.
  • a functional block (component) that performs transmission functions may be called a transmitting unit, transmitter, etc.
  • transmitting unit transmitter
  • a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 11 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, memory 1002, storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.
  • the hardware configuration of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.
  • processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.
  • the functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of reading and writing data from and to the memory 1002 and storage 1003.
  • the processor 1001 for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer.
  • the processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) that includes an interface with peripheral devices, a control unit, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • control unit e.g., arithmetic unit
  • registers e.g., arithmetic unit
  • at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transceiver unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.
  • the processor 1001 reads programs (program code), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes in accordance with these.
  • the programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above-described embodiments.
  • the control unit 110 (210) may be implemented by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be used for other functional blocks.
  • Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of, for example, at least one of Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), or other suitable storage medium.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
  • EEPROM Electrically EPROM
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • Memory 1002 may also be referred to as a register, cache, main memory, etc.
  • Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program code), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disc (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disc, a Blu-ray disc), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium.
  • Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.
  • the communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also referred to as a network device, network controller, network card, or communication module.
  • the communication device 1004 may be configured to include high-frequency switches, duplexers, filters, frequency synthesizers, etc. to implement at least one of frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD).
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • the above-mentioned transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220), transmitter/receiver antenna 130 (230), etc. may be implemented by the communication device 1004.
  • the transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitter unit 120a (220a) and a receiver unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.
  • the input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, mouse, microphone, switch, button, sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside.
  • the output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, speaker, Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one device (e.g., a touch panel).
  • each device such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information.
  • the bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.
  • the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using this hardware.
  • the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.
  • devices included in the core network 30 may also be realized using the above-mentioned functional block/hardware configuration.
  • a channel, a symbol, and a signal may be interchangeable.
  • a signal may also be a message.
  • a reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may also be called a pilot, pilot signal, etc. depending on the applicable standard.
  • a component carrier may also be called a cell, frequency carrier, carrier frequency, etc.
  • a radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain.
  • Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe.
  • a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain.
  • a subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.
  • numerology may be a communication parameter applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel.
  • Numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: subcarrier spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, transmission time interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame structure, specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain, and specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • TTI transmission time interval
  • radio frame structure specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain
  • specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.
  • a slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols).
  • a slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.
  • a slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A.
  • a PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.
  • Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units for transmitting signals. Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol may each be referred to by a different name. Note that the time units used in this disclosure, such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol, may be interchangeable.
  • one subframe may be referred to as a TTI, or multiple consecutive subframes may be referred to as a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be referred to as a TTI.
  • at least one of a subframe and a TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) as in existing LTE, or may be a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or may be a period longer than 1 ms.
  • the unit representing a TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc. instead of a subframe.
  • TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication.
  • a base station performs scheduling to allocate radio resources (such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) to each user terminal in TTI units.
  • radio resources such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal
  • TTI is not limited to this.
  • the TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-encoded data packet (transport block), code block, code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc.
  • the time interval e.g., number of symbols
  • the time interval to which a transport block, code block, code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.
  • one slot or one minislot is called a TTI
  • one or more TTIs may be the smallest time unit for scheduling.
  • the number of slots (minislots) that make up the smallest time unit for scheduling may be controlled.
  • a TTI with a time length of 1 ms may be called a regular TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, regular subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc.
  • a TTI shorter than a regular TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial TTI (partial or fractional TTI), shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.
  • a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms
  • a short TTI e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.
  • a resource block is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12.
  • the number of subcarriers included in an RB may also be determined based on numerology.
  • an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length.
  • One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.
  • one or more RBs may also be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.
  • PRB physical resource block
  • SCG sub-carrier group
  • REG resource element group
  • PRB pair an RB pair, etc.
  • a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs).
  • REs resource elements
  • one RE may be a radio resource region of one subcarrier and one symbol.
  • a Bandwidth Part (which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth) may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier.
  • the common RBs may be identified by the index of the RB relative to the common reference point of the carrier.
  • PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within that BWP.
  • BWPs may include UL BWPs (BWPs for UL) and DL BWPs (BWPs for DL).
  • BWPs for UL
  • BWPs for DL DL BWPs
  • One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.
  • At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP.
  • BWP bitmap
  • the structures of the radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols described above are merely examples.
  • the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, symbol length, and cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.
  • radio resources may be indicated by a predetermined index.
  • the information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies.
  • data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.
  • Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.
  • Input and output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (for example, memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input and output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be sent to another device.
  • any first device e.g., UE/base station
  • any second device e.g., base station/UE
  • the notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods.
  • the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI))), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • SIB System Information Block
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • L1/L2 control signal Layer 1/Layer 2
  • L1 control information L1 control signal
  • RRC signaling may also be referred to as RRC messages, such as RRC Connection Setup messages or RRC Connection Reconfiguration messages.
  • MAC signaling may also be notified using, for example, MAC Control Elements (CEs).
  • CEs MAC Control Elements
  • notification of specified information is not limited to explicit notification, but may also be done implicitly (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).
  • the determination may be made based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented as true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (for example, a comparison with a predetermined value).
  • Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.
  • software, instructions, information, etc. may be transmitted and received via a transmission medium.
  • a transmission medium such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
  • wired technology such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
  • wireless technology such as infrared or microwave
  • Network may refer to devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).
  • precoding "precoding weight”
  • QCL Quality of Co-Location
  • TCI state Transmission Configuration Indication state
  • spatialal relation "spatial domain filter,” “transmit power,” “phase rotation,” “antenna port,” “layer,” “number of layers,” “rank,” “resource,” “resource set,” “beam,” “beam width,” “beam angle,” “antenna,” “antenna element,” “panel,” “UE panel,” “transmitting entity,” “receiving entity,” etc.
  • the term "antenna port” may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port).
  • the term “resource” may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.).
  • the resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources.
  • the spatial domain transmit filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.
  • the above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.
  • CDM Code Division Multiplexing
  • RS Reference Signal
  • CORESET Control Resource Set
  • beam SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be read as interchangeable terms.
  • TCI state downlink TCI state
  • DL TCI state downlink TCI state
  • UL TCI state uplink TCI state
  • unified TCI state common TCI state
  • joint TCI state may be interpreted interchangeably.
  • index identifier
  • indicator indication
  • resource ID identifier
  • sequence list, set, group, cluster, and subset
  • TCI state ID may be interchangeable.
  • TCI state ID may be interchangeable as “set of spatial relationship information (TCI state)", “one or more pieces of spatial relationship information”, etc.
  • TCI state and TCI may be interchangeable.
  • Spatial relationship information and spatial relationship may be interchangeable.
  • Base Station BS
  • Radio Base Station Fire Base Station
  • NodeB NodeB
  • eNB eNodeB
  • gNB gNodeB
  • Access Point "Transmission Point (TP),” “Reception Point (RP),” “Transmission/Reception Point (TRP),” “Panel,” “Cell,” “Sector,” “Cell Group,” “Carrier,” and “Component Carrier”
  • Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, and picocell.
  • a base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells.
  • a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also be provided with communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small indoor base station (Remote Radio Head (RRH))).
  • RRH Remote Radio Head
  • the terms "cell” or “sector” refer to part or all of the coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services within this coverage area.
  • a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on that information.
  • MS Mobile Station
  • UE User Equipment
  • a mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.
  • At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be referred to as a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.
  • the mobile body in question refers to an object that can move at any speed, and of course also includes cases where the mobile body is stationary.
  • Examples of the mobile body in question include, but are not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these.
  • the mobile body in question may also be a mobile body that moves autonomously based on operation commands.
  • the moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned).
  • a vehicle e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.
  • an unmanned moving object e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.
  • a robot manned or unmanned.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations.
  • at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to one embodiment.
  • the vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.
  • various sensors including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58
  • an information service unit 59 including a communication module 60.
  • the drive unit 41 is composed of, for example, at least one of an engine, a motor, or a hybrid of an engine and a motor.
  • the steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handle) and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.
  • the electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an input/output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle.
  • the electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).
  • ECU Electronic Control Unit
  • Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal obtained by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal obtained by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal for the accelerator pedal 43 obtained by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal for the brake pedal 44 obtained by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal for the shift lever 45 obtained by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. obtained by an object detection sensor 58.
  • the information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, that provide (output) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the information service unit 59 uses information obtained from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.
  • various information/services e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services
  • the information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.) that output to the outside.
  • input devices e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.
  • output devices e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions to prevent accidents and reduce the driver's driving burden, such as millimeter-wave radar, Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), cameras, positioning locators (e.g., Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., High Definition (HD) maps, Autonomous Vehicle (AV) maps), gyro systems (e.g., Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and Inertial Navigation System (INS)), artificial intelligence (AI) chips, and AI processors, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices.
  • the driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize driving assistance or autonomous driving functions.
  • the communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63.
  • the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58, all of which are provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with external devices. For example, it sends and receives various information to and from external devices via wireless communication.
  • the communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49.
  • the external device may be, for example, the base station 10 or user terminal 20 described above.
  • the communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 described above (or may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).
  • the communications module 60 may transmit at least one of the following to an external device via wireless communication: signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49; information obtained based on these signals; and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59.
  • the electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may also be referred to as input units that accept input.
  • the PUSCH transmitted by the communications module 60 may include information based on the above input.
  • the communications module 60 receives various information (traffic information, traffic signal information, vehicle-to-vehicle information, etc.) transmitted from external devices and displays it on the information service unit 59 installed in the vehicle.
  • the information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH received by the communications module 60 (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH)).
  • the communication module 60 stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and other components provided on the vehicle 40.
  • the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal.
  • the aspects/embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D) or Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X)).
  • the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the base station 10 described above.
  • terms such as “uplink” and “downlink” may be read as terms corresponding to communication between terminals (for example, "sidelink”).
  • terms such as uplink channel and downlink channel may be read as sidelink channel.
  • the term "user terminal” in this disclosure may be interpreted as “base station.”
  • the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the user terminal 20 described above.
  • operations described as being performed by a base station may in some cases also be performed by its upper node.
  • a network including one or more network nodes having base stations it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination thereof.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving-Gateway
  • each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. Furthermore, the processing procedures, sequences, flowcharts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as they are consistent. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present various step elements in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the specific order presented.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A LTE-Advanced
  • LTE-B LTE-Beyond
  • SUPER 3G IMT-Advanced
  • 4th generation mobile communication system 4th generation mobile communication system
  • 5G 5th generation mobile communication system
  • 6G 6th generation mobile communication system
  • xG x is, for example, an integer or decimal number
  • Future Radio Access FX
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access
  • UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
  • IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi
  • IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (registered trademark)
  • IEEE 802.20 Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or other appropriate wireless communication methods, as
  • the phrase “based on” does not mean “based only on,” unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase “based on” means both “based only on” and “based at least on.”
  • any reference to an element using a designation such as "first,” “second,” etc. does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and a second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must in some way precede the second element.
  • determining may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, “determining” may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., searching in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.
  • judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc.
  • judgment (decision) may be considered to mean “judging (deciding)” some kind of action.
  • judgment (decision) may be read interchangeably with the above-mentioned actions.
  • expect may be interchangeably read as “be expected.”
  • "expect(s)" (“" may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to-infinitive, etc.) may be interchangeably read as “be expected" or “does... (if the above "! is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to").”
  • "does not expect" may be interchangeably read as "be not expected" or "does not...
  • apparatus A is not expected
  • apparatus B may be interchangeably read as "apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect" from apparatus A (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).
  • maximum transmit power used in this disclosure may refer to the maximum value of transmit power, the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or the rated UE maximum transmit power.
  • connection means any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are “connected” or “coupled” to each other.
  • the coupling or connection between elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected” may be read as "access.”
  • a and B are different may mean “A and B are different from each other.” Note that this term may also mean “A and B are each different from C.” Terms such as “separate” and “combined” may also be interpreted in the same way as “different.”
  • expressions such as "when A, B,” “if A, (then) B,” “B upon A,” “B in response to A,” “B based on A,” “B during/while A,” “B before A,” “B at (the same time as)/on A,” “B after A,” “B since A,” and “B until A” may be interchangeable.
  • a and B may be replaced with other appropriate expressions, such as nouns, gerunds, and regular sentences, depending on the context.
  • the time difference between A and B may be nearly zero (immediately after or immediately before).
  • a time offset may also be applied to the time at which A occurs.
  • “A” may be interpreted interchangeably as “before/after the time offset at which A occurs.”
  • the time offset (e.g., one or more symbols/slots) may be predefined or may be determined by the UE based on signaled information.
  • timing time, duration, time instance, any time unit (e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe), period, occasion, and resource may be interpreted interchangeably.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure is characterized by including: a reception unit that receives setting information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) which is set for a specific application that is used for management of an uplink (UL) beam to a UL reception point; and a control unit that determines a UL beam for the UL reception point on the basis of a specified rule or a transmitted instruction. According to this one aspect of the present disclosure, UL beam management can be performed appropriately for UL reception points/microBSs.

Description

端末、無線通信方法及び基地局Terminal, wireless communication method and base station

 本開示は、次世代移動通信システムにおける端末、無線通信方法及び基地局に関する。 This disclosure relates to terminals, wireless communication methods, and base stations in next-generation mobile communication systems.

 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System(UMTS)ネットワークにおいて、更なる高速データレート、低遅延などを目的としてLong Term Evolution(LTE)が仕様化された(非特許文献1)。また、LTE(Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP(登録商標)) Release(Rel.)8、9)の更なる大容量、高度化などを目的として、LTE-Advanced(3GPP Rel.10-14)が仕様化された。 Long Term Evolution (LTE) was specified for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) networks with the aim of achieving even higher data rates and lower latency (Non-Patent Document 1). Furthermore, LTE-Advanced (3GPP Rel. 10-14) was specified with the aim of achieving even greater capacity and sophistication over LTE (Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP (registered trademark)) Release (Rel.) 8 and 9).

 LTEの後継システム(例えば、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、5G+(plus)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、New Radio(NR)、3GPP Rel.15以降などともいう)も検討されている。 Successor systems to LTE (e.g., 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 5G+ (plus), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), New Radio (NR), 3GPP Rel. 15 or later, etc.) are also being considered.

3GPP TS 36.300 V8.12.0 “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 8)”、2010年4月3GPP TS 36.300 V8.12.0 “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Univers al Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2 (Release 8)”, April 2010

 将来の無線通信システムにおいて、上りリンク(UL)カバレッジの拡大のために、一般的な送受信ポイントに加えて、UL受信ポイントを設けることが検討されている。また、マクロBase Station(BS)とマイクロBSを用いたUL高密度配置/Heterogeneous Network(HetNet)などが検討されている。 In future wireless communication systems, in order to expand uplink (UL) coverage, it is being considered to install UL receiving points in addition to general transmitting and receiving points. Also being considered are high-density UL deployments/Heterogeneous Networks (HetNets) using macro Base Stations (BSs) and micro BSs.

 しかしながら、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するULビーム管理をどのように実施するかについて、明らかになっていない。これにより、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するUL送信を適切に実施できず、通信スループットが低下するおそれがある。 However, it is not clear how UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs should be performed. This could result in inappropriate UL transmission to UL receiving points/micro BSs, resulting in reduced communication throughput.

 そこで、本開示は、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するULビーム管理を適切に実施できる端末、無線通信方法及び基地局を提供することを目的の1つとする。 Therefore, one of the objectives of this disclosure is to provide a terminal, wireless communication method, and base station that can appropriately perform UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs.

 本開示の一態様に係る端末は、上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を受信する受信部と、指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定する制御部と、を有することを特徴とする。 A terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure is characterized by having a receiving unit that receives setting information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) that is set to a specific purpose for use in managing an uplink (UL) beam to an uplink (UL) receiving point, and a control unit that determines a UL beam for the UL receiving point based on a specified rule or transmitted instructions.

 本開示の一態様によれば、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するULビーム管理を適切に実施できる。 According to one aspect of the present disclosure, UL beam management can be properly performed for UL receiving points/micro BSs.

図1Aは、一般的な送受信ポイントの配置例を示す図である。図1Bは、UL高密度配置例を示す図である。1A is a diagram showing an example of a general arrangement of transmission and reception points, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a high-density UL arrangement. 図2は、Heterogeneous Network(HetNet)のDL/ULカバレッジの例を示す図である。Figure 2 shows an example of DL/UL coverage of a Heterogeneous Network (HetNet). 図3は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-2の例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of option 1-2 of the second embodiment. 図4は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-3の例を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing examples of options 1-3 of the second embodiment. 図5は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-4の例を示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing examples of options 1-4 of the second embodiment. 図6は、第2の実施形態のオプション1’-1のSRSリソースセット指示フィールドの第1の例を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the SRS resource set indication field of option 1'-1 of the second embodiment. 図7は、第2の実施形態のプション1’-1のSRSリソースセット指示フィールドの第2の例を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the SRS resource set indication field of option 1'-1 of the second embodiment. 図8は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment. 図9は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. 図10は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図11は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to an embodiment. 図12は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a vehicle according to an embodiment.

(SRS、PUSCHの送信の制御)
 Rel.15 NRにおいて、端末(ユーザ端末(user terminal)、User Equipment(UE))は、測定用参照信号(例えば、サウンディング参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS)))の送信に用いられる情報(SRS設定情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-Config」内のパラメータ)を受信してもよい。
(Control of SRS and PUSCH transmission)
In Rel. 15 NR, a terminal (user terminal, User Equipment (UE)) may receive information (SRS configuration information, for example, parameters in the RRC control element "SRS-Config") used to transmit a measurement reference signal (e.g., a sounding reference signal (SRS)).

 具体的には、UEは、1つ又は複数のSRSリソースセットに関する情報(SRSリソースセット情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-ResourceSet」)と、一つ又は複数のSRSリソースに関する情報(SRSリソース情報、例えば、RRC制御要素の「SRS-Resource」)との少なくとも1つを受信してもよい。 Specifically, the UE may receive at least one of information regarding one or more SRS resource sets (SRS resource set information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-ResourceSet") and information regarding one or more SRS resources (SRS resource information, e.g., the RRC control element "SRS-Resource").

 1つのSRSリソースセットは、所定数のSRSリソースに関連してもよい(所定数のSRSリソースをグループ化してもよい)。各SRSリソースは、SRSリソース識別子(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))又はSRSリソースID(Identifier)によって特定されてもよい。 An SRS resource set may be associated with (or group together) a predetermined number of SRS resources. Each SRS resource may be identified by an SRS Resource Indicator (SRI) or SRS Resource Identifier (ID).

 SRSリソースセット情報は、SRSリソースセットID(SRS-ResourceSetId)、当該リソースセットにおいて用いられるSRSリソースID(SRS-ResourceId)のリスト、SRSリソースタイプ、SRSの用途(usage)の情報を含んでもよい。 The SRS resource set information may include the SRS resource set ID (SRS-ResourceSetId), a list of SRS resource IDs (SRS-ResourceId) used in the resource set, the SRS resource type, and SRS usage information.

 ここで、SRSリソースタイプは、周期的SRS(Periodic SRS(P-SRS))、セミパーシステントSRS(Semi-Persistent SRS(SP-SRS))、非周期的CSI(Aperiodic SRS(A-SRS))のいずれかを示してもよい。なお、UEは、P-SRS及びSP-SRSを周期的(又はアクティベート後、周期的)に送信し、A-SRSをDCIのSRSリクエストに基づいて送信してもよい。 Here, the SRS resource type may indicate either periodic SRS (P-SRS), semi-persistent SRS (SP-SRS), or aperiodic CSI (Aperiodic SRS (A-SRS)). Note that the UE may transmit P-SRS and SP-SRS periodically (or periodically after activation) and transmit A-SRS based on an SRS request in the DCI.

 また、用途(RRCパラメータの「usage」、L1(Layer-1)パラメータの「SRS-SetUse」)は、例えば、ビーム管理(beamManagement)、コードブック(codebook(CB))、ノンコードブック(noncodebook(NCB))、アンテナスイッチングなどであってもよい。コードブック又はノンコードブック用途のSRSは、SRIに基づくコードブックベース又はノンコードブックベースの上りリンク共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))送信のプリコーダの決定に用いられてもよい。 Furthermore, the use (RRC parameter "usage", L1 (Layer-1) parameter "SRS-SetUse") may be, for example, beam management, codebook (CB), non-codebook (NCB), antenna switching, etc. An SRS for codebook or non-codebook use may be used to determine a precoder for codebook-based or non-codebook-based uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) transmission based on the SRI.

 例えば、UEは、コードブックベース送信(codebook-based transmission)の場合、SRI、送信ランクインディケーター(Transmitted Rank Indicator(TRI))及び送信プリコーディング行列インディケーター(Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator(TPMI))に基づいて、PUSCH送信のためのプリコーダ(プリコーディング行列)を決定してもよい。UEは、ノンコードブックベース送信(non-codebook-based transmission)の場合、SRIに基づいてPUSCH送信のためのプリコーダを決定してもよい。 For example, in the case of codebook-based transmission, the UE may determine the precoder (precoding matrix) for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI, the Transmitted Rank Indicator (TRI), and the Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator (TPMI). In the case of non-codebook-based transmission, the UE may determine the precoder for PUSCH transmission based on the SRI.

 SRSリソース情報は、SRSリソースID(SRS-ResourceId)、SRSポート数、SRSポート番号、送信Comb、SRSリソースマッピング(例えば、時間及び/又は周波数リソース位置、リソースオフセット、リソースの周期、繰り返し数、SRSシンボル数、SRS帯域幅など)、ホッピング関連情報、SRSリソースタイプ、系列ID、SRSの空間関係情報などを含んでもよい。 The SRS resource information may include an SRS resource ID (SRS-ResourceId), the number of SRS ports, the SRS port number, the transmission comb, SRS resource mapping (e.g., time and/or frequency resource position, resource offset, resource period, number of repetitions, number of SRS symbols, SRS bandwidth, etc.), hopping-related information, an SRS resource type, a sequence ID, spatial relationship information of the SRS, etc.

 SRSの空間関係情報(例えば、RRC情報要素の「spatialRelationInfo」)は、所定の参照信号とSRSとの間の空間関係情報を示してもよい。当該所定の参照信号は、同期信号/ブロードキャストチャネル(Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel(SS/PBCH))ブロック、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))及びSRS(例えば別のSRS)の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS/PBCHブロックは、同期信号ブロック(SSB)と呼ばれてもよい。 The spatial relationship information of the SRS (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") may indicate spatial relationship information between a predetermined reference signal and the SRS. The predetermined reference signal may be at least one of a Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel (SS/PBCH) block, a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS), and an SRS (e.g., another SRS). The SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB).

 SRSの空間関係情報は、上記所定の参照信号のインデックスとして、SSBインデックス、CSI-RSリソースID、SRSリソースIDの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The spatial relationship information for the SRS may include at least one of an SSB index, a CSI-RS resource ID, and an SRS resource ID as an index for the predetermined reference signal.

 なお、本開示において、SSBインデックス、SSBリソースID及びSSB Resource Indicator(SSBRI)は互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、CSI-RSインデックス、CSI-RSリソースID及びCSI-RS Resource Indicator(CRI)は互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、SRSインデックス、SRSリソースID及びSRIは互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Note that in the present disclosure, the SSB index, SSB resource ID, and SSB Resource Indicator (SSBRI) may be interchangeable. Also, the CSI-RS index, CSI-RS resource ID, and CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI) may be interchangeable. Also, the SRS index, SRS resource ID, and SRI may be interchangeable.

 SRSの空間関係情報は、上記所定の参照信号に対応するサービングセルインデックス、BWPインデックス(BWP ID)などを含んでもよい。 The spatial relationship information of the SRS may include a serving cell index, a BWP index (BWP ID), etc. corresponding to the above-mentioned specified reference signal.

 UEは、あるSRSリソースについて、SSB又はCSI-RSと、SRSとに関する空間関係情報を設定される場合には、当該SSB又はCSI-RSの受信のための空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン受信フィルタ)と同じ空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)を用いて当該SRSリソースを送信してもよい。この場合、UEはSSB又はCSI-RSのUE受信ビームとSRSのUE送信ビームとが同じであると想定してもよい。 When spatial relationship information regarding an SSB or CSI-RS and an SRS is configured for a certain SRS resource, the UE may transmit the SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter used to receive the SSB or CSI-RS. In this case, the UE may assume that the UE receive beam for the SSB or CSI-RS and the UE transmit beam for the SRS are the same.

 UEは、あるSRS(ターゲットSRS)リソースについて、別のSRS(参照SRS)と当該SRS(ターゲットSRS)とに関する空間関係情報を設定される場合には、当該参照SRSの送信のための空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)と同じ空間ドメインフィルタ(空間ドメイン送信フィルタ)を用いてターゲットSRSリソースを送信してもよい。つまり、この場合、UEは参照SRSのUE送信ビームとターゲットSRSのUE送信ビームとが同じであると想定してもよい。 When spatial relationship information regarding a certain SRS (target SRS) resource is configured between another SRS (reference SRS) and the SRS (target SRS), the UE may transmit the target SRS resource using the same spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) as the spatial domain filter (spatial domain transmit filter) used to transmit the reference SRS. In other words, in this case, the UE may assume that the UE transmit beam for the reference SRS and the UE transmit beam for the target SRS are the same.

 UEは、DCI(例えば、DCIフォーマット0_1)内の所定フィールド(例えば、SRSリソース識別子(SRI)フィールド)の値に基づいて、当該DCIによってスケジュールされるPUSCHの空間関係を決定してもよい。具体的には、UEは、当該所定フィールドの値(例えば、SRI)に基づいて決定されるSRSリソースの空間関係情報(例えば、RRC情報要素の「spatialRelationInfo」)をPUSCH送信に用いてもよい。 The UE may determine the spatial relationship of the PUSCH scheduled by a DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1) based on the value of a predetermined field (e.g., the SRS resource identifier (SRI) field) in the DCI. Specifically, the UE may use spatial relationship information (e.g., the RRC information element "spatialRelationInfo") of the SRS resources determined based on the value of the predetermined field (e.g., the SRI) for PUSCH transmission.

 Rel.15/16 NRでは、PUSCHに対し、コードブックベース送信を用いる場合、UEは、最大2個のSRSリソースを有する用途がコードブックのSRSリソースセットを、RRCによって設定され、当該最大2個のSRSリソースの1つをDCI(1ビットのSRIフィールド)によって指示されてもよい。PUSCHの送信ビームは、SRIフィールドによって指定されることになる。 In Rel. 15/16 NR, when codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with an SRS resource set for the codebook with up to two SRS resources, and one of the up to two SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (a 1-bit SRI field). The transmission beam for PUSCH is specified by the SRI field.

 UEは、プリコーディング情報及びレイヤ数フィールド(以下、プリコーディング情報フィールドとも呼ぶ)に基づいて、PUSCHのためのTPMI及びレイヤ数(送信ランク)を判断してもよい。UEは、上記SRIフィールドによって指定されたSRSリソースのために設定された上位レイヤパラメータの「nrofSRS-Ports」によって示されるSRSポート数と同じポート数についての上りリンク用のコードブックから、上記TPMI、レイヤ数などに基づいてプリコーダを選択してもよい。 The UE may determine the TPMI and number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the precoding information and number of layers field (hereinafter also referred to as the precoding information field). The UE may select a precoder based on the TPMI, number of layers, etc. from an uplink codebook for the same number of SRS ports as indicated by the upper layer parameter "nrofSRS-Ports" configured for the SRS resource specified by the SRI field.

 Rel.15/16 NRでは、PUSCHに対し、ノンコードブックベース送信を用いる場合、UEは、最大4個のSRSリソースを有する用途がノンコードブックのSRSリソースセットを、RRCによって設定され、当該最大4個のSRSリソースの1つ以上をDCI(2ビットのSRIフィールド)によって指示されてもよい。 In Rel. 15/16 NR, when non-codebook-based transmission is used for PUSCH, the UE is configured by RRC with a non-codebook-used SRS resource set having up to four SRS resources, and one or more of the up to four SRS resources may be indicated by DCI (2-bit SRI field).

 UEは、上記SRIフィールドに基づいて、PUSCHのためのレイヤ数(送信ランク)を決定してもよい。例えば、UEは、上記SRIフィールドによって指定されるSRSリソースの数が、PUSCHのためのレイヤ数と同じであると判断してもよい。また、UEは、上記SRSリソースのプリコーダを算出してもよい。 The UE may determine the number of layers (transmission rank) for the PUSCH based on the SRI field. For example, the UE may determine that the number of SRS resources specified by the SRI field is the same as the number of layers for the PUSCH. The UE may also calculate a precoder for the SRS resources.

 当該SRSリソース(又は当該SRSリソースが属するSRSリソースセット)に関連するCSI-RS(associated CSI-RSと呼ばれてもよい)が上位レイヤで設定されている場合、PUSCHの送信ビームは当該設定された関連するCSI-RS(の測定)に基づいて算出されてもよい。そうでない場合、PUSCHの送信ビームはSRIによって指定されてもよい。 If the CSI-RS (which may also be called associated CSI-RS) associated with the SRS resource (or the SRS resource set to which the SRS resource belongs) is configured by a higher layer, the transmission beam for the PUSCH may be calculated based on (measurements of) the configured associated CSI-RS. Otherwise, the transmission beam for the PUSCH may be specified by the SRI.

 なお、UEは、コードブックベースPUSCH送信を用いるかノンコードブックベースPUSCH送信を用いるかを、送信スキームを示す上位レイヤパラメータ「txConfig」によって設定されてもよい。当該パラメータは、「コードブック(codebook)」又は「ノンコードブック(nonCodebook)」の値を示してもよい。 The UE may be configured to use codebook-based PUSCH transmission or non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission using the higher layer parameter "txConfig," which indicates the transmission scheme. This parameter may indicate the value "codebook" or "non-codebook."

 本開示において、コードブックベースPUSCH(コードブックベースPUSCH送信、コードブックベース送信)は、UEに送信スキームとして「コードブック」を設定された場合のPUSCHを意味してもよい。本開示において、ノンコードブックベースPUSCH(ノンコードブックベースPUSCH送信、ノンコードブックベース送信)は、UEに送信スキームとして「ノンコードブック」を設定された場合のPUSCHを意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, codebook-based PUSCH (codebook-based PUSCH transmission, codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme for the UE. In this disclosure, non-codebook-based PUSCH (non-codebook-based PUSCH transmission, non-codebook-based transmission) may refer to PUSCH when "non-codebook" is configured as the transmission scheme for the UE.

(TCI、空間関係、QCL)
 NRでは、送信設定指示状態(Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態))に基づいて、信号及びチャネルの少なくとも一方(信号/チャネルと表現する)のUEにおける受信処理(例えば、受信、デマッピング、復調、復号の少なくとも1つ)、送信処理(例えば、送信、マッピング、プリコーディング、変調、符号化の少なくとも1つ)を制御することが検討されている。
(TCI, spatial relationships, QCL)
In NR, it is considered to control the reception processing (e.g., at least one of reception, demapping, demodulation, and decoding) and transmission processing (e.g., at least one of transmission, mapping, precoding, modulation, and encoding) in the UE of at least one of the signal and the channel (referred to as the signal/channel) based on the transmission configuration indication state (TCI state).

 TCI状態は下りリンクの信号/チャネルに適用されるものを表してもよい。上りリンクの信号/チャネルに適用されるTCI状態に相当するものは、空間関係(spatial relation)と表現されてもよい。 TCI states may refer to those that apply to downlink signals/channels. The equivalent of TCI states that apply to uplink signals/channels may be expressed as spatial relations.

 TCI状態とは、信号/チャネルの疑似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))に関する情報であり、空間受信パラメータ、空間関係情報(Spatial Relation Information)などと呼ばれてもよい。TCI状態は、チャネルごと又は信号ごとにUEに設定されてもよい。 TCI status is information about the quasi-co-location (QCL) of signals/channels, and may also be called spatial reception parameters, spatial relation information, etc. The TCI status may be set in the UE for each channel or signal.

 QCLとは、信号/チャネルの統計的性質を示す指標である。例えば、ある信号/チャネルと他の信号/チャネルがQCLの関係である場合、これらの異なる複数の信号/チャネル間において、ドップラーシフト(Doppler shift)、ドップラースプレッド(Doppler spread)、平均遅延(average delay)、遅延スプレッド(delay spread)、空間パラメータ(spatial parameter)(例えば、空間受信パラメータ(spatial Rx parameter))の少なくとも1つが同一である(これらの少なくとも1つに関してQCLである)と仮定できることを意味してもよい。 QCL is an index that indicates the statistical properties of a signal/channel. For example, if a signal/channel has a QCL relationship with another signal/channel, it may mean that it can be assumed that at least one of the Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial parameters (e.g., spatial Rx parameters) is the same between these different signals/channels (i.e., they have QCL with respect to at least one of these).

 なお、空間受信パラメータは、UEの受信ビーム(例えば、受信アナログビーム)に対応してもよく、空間的QCLに基づいてビームが特定されてもよい。本開示におけるQCL(又はQCLの少なくとも1つの要素)は、sQCL(spatial QCL)で読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the spatial reception parameters may correspond to the reception beam of the UE (e.g., a reception analog beam), and the beam may be identified based on the spatial QCL. In this disclosure, the QCL (or at least one element of the QCL) may be interpreted as sQCL (spatial QCL).

 QCLは、複数のタイプ(QCLタイプ)が規定されてもよい。例えば、同一であると仮定できるパラメータ(又はパラメータセット)が異なる4つのQCLタイプA-Dが設けられてもよく、以下に当該パラメータ(QCLパラメータと呼ばれてもよい)について示す:
 ・QCLタイプA(QCL-A):ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延及び遅延スプレッド、
 ・QCLタイプB(QCL-B):ドップラーシフト及びドップラースプレッド、
 ・QCLタイプC(QCL-C):ドップラーシフト及び平均遅延、
 ・QCLタイプD(QCL-D):空間受信パラメータ。
A plurality of types (QCL types) of QCL may be defined. For example, four QCL types A to D may be provided, each having different parameters (or parameter sets) that can be assumed to be the same. The parameters (which may be referred to as QCL parameters) are as follows:
QCL Type A (QCL-A): Doppler shift, Doppler spread, mean delay and delay spread,
QCL Type B (QCL-B): Doppler shift and Doppler spread,
QCL Type C (QCL-C): Doppler shift and mean delay,
QCL Type D (QCL-D): Spatial reception parameters.

 ある制御リソースセット(Control Resource Set(CORESET))、チャネル又は参照信号が、別のCORESET、チャネル又は参照信号と特定のQCL(例えば、QCLタイプD)の関係にあるとUEが想定することは、QCL想定(QCL assumption)と呼ばれてもよい。 The UE's assumption that a Control Resource Set (CORESET), channel, or reference signal has a specific QCL (e.g., QCL type D) relationship with another CORESET, channel, or reference signal may be referred to as a QCL assumption.

 UEは、信号/チャネルのTCI状態又はQCL想定に基づいて、当該信号/チャネルの送信ビーム(Txビーム)及び受信ビーム(Rxビーム)の少なくとも1つを決定してもよい。 The UE may determine at least one of the transmit beam (Tx beam) and receive beam (Rx beam) for a signal/channel based on the TCI condition or QCL assumption of the signal/channel.

 TCI状態は、例えば、対象となるチャネル(言い換えると、当該チャネル用の参照信号(Reference Signal(RS)))と、別の信号(例えば、別のRS)とのQCLに関する情報であってもよい。TCI状態は、上位レイヤシグナリング、物理レイヤシグナリング又はこれらの組み合わせによって設定(指示)されてもよい。 The TCI state may be, for example, information regarding the QCL between the target channel (in other words, the reference signal (RS) for that channel) and another signal (e.g., another RS). The TCI state may be set (indicated) by higher layer signaling, physical layer signaling, or a combination of these.

 なお、TCI状態の適用対象となるチャネル/信号は、ターゲットチャネル/参照信号(target channel/RS)、単にターゲットなどと呼ばれてもよく、上記別の信号はリファレンス参照信号(reference RS)、ソースRS(source RS)、単にリファレンスなどと呼ばれてもよい。 Note that the channel/signal to which the TCI state is applied may be referred to as the target channel/reference signal (target channel/RS), or simply the target, and the other signal may be referred to as the reference signal (reference RS), source RS, or simply the reference.

 TCI状態又は空間関係が設定(指定)されるチャネルは、例えば、下りリンク共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、下りリンク制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))、上りリンク共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上りリンク制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。 The channel for which the TCI state or spatial relationship is set (specified) may be, for example, at least one of the following: a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)), and an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)).

 また、当該チャネルとQCL関係となるRSは、例えば、同期信号ブロック(Synchronization Signal Block(SSB))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、トラッキング用CSI-RS(Tracking Reference Signal(TRS)とも呼ぶ)、QCL検出用参照信号(QRSとも呼ぶ)、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))、などの少なくとも1つであってもよい。 Furthermore, the RS that has a QCL relationship with the channel may be, for example, at least one of a synchronization signal block (SSB), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a sounding reference signal (SRS), a tracking CSI-RS (also called a tracking reference signal (TRS)), a QCL detection reference signal (also called a QRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc.

 SSBは、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))、セカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))及びブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))の少なくとも1つを含む信号ブロックである。SSBは、SS/PBCHブロックと呼ばれてもよい。 An SSB is a signal block that includes at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). An SSB may also be referred to as an SS/PBCH block.

 TCI状態のQCLタイプXのRSは、あるチャネル/信号(のDMRS)とQCLタイプXの関係にあるRSを意味してもよく、このRSは当該TCI状態のQCLタイプXのQCLソースと呼ばれてもよい。 An RS of QCL type X in a TCI state may refer to an RS that has a QCL type X relationship with a certain channel/signal (DMRS), and this RS may be called a QCL source of QCL type X in that TCI state.

(シナリオ1:UL高密度配置(ULのみのTRP))
 Rel.15 NRにおいては、PUSCH、PUCCH、PRACH、PDSCH、PDCCH、PBCHのカバレッジ(到達距離)が均等でない。特に高い周波数において、PUSCHのカバレッジが制限される。将来の無線通信システム(例えば、Rel.18、Rel.19、又はそれ以降)においては、ULカバレッジ及びULスループットの少なくとも1つを改善することが検討されている。
(Scenario 1: High-density UL deployment (UL-only TRP))
In Rel. 15 NR, the coverage (reaching distance) of PUSCH, PUCCH, PRACH, PDSCH, PDCCH, and PBCH is uneven. PUSCH coverage is limited, especially at higher frequencies. Future wireless communication systems (e.g., Rel. 18, Rel. 19, or later) are expected to improve at least one of UL coverage and UL throughput.

 ULカバレッジの拡大のために、一般的な送受信ポイントに加えて、UL受信ポイントを設けることが検討されている。そこで、一般的な送受信ポイントの配置例と、UL受信ポイントを設けた配置例(UL高密度配置)について説明する。 In order to expand UL coverage, the installation of UL reception points in addition to general transmission and reception points is being considered. Here, we will explain examples of the placement of general transmission and reception points, as well as an example of a placement with UL reception points (high-density UL placement).

 図1Aは、一般的な送受信ポイントの配置例を示す図である。図1Aでは、UEは、送受信ポイント(transmission/reception point(TRP))からDL信号を受信し、そのTRPにUL信号を送信する。例えば、UEとTRPが遠い場合、パスロスが大きく、通信品質が低下するおそれがある。 Figure 1A shows an example of a typical transmission/reception point arrangement. In Figure 1A, a UE receives a DL signal from a transmission/reception point (TRP) and transmits a UL signal to that TRP. For example, if the UE and TRP are far apart, there may be significant path loss, resulting in a decrease in communication quality.

 図1Bは、UL高密度配置例を示す図である。ULカバレッジの拡大のために、図1Aに示すようなDL送信ポイントに加えて、図1Bに示すようなUL受信ポイントが設けられることが検討されている。図1Bでは、UEは、マクロセルに対応するDL送信ポイント(TRP/セントラルTRP/DL TRP/マクロTRP)からDL信号を受信し、UL受信ポイント(例えば、パスロス/受信電力がより小さい受信ポイント)にUL信号を送信する。ただし、UEは、DL送信ポイントへUL送信を行うことが可能であってもよい。 Figure 1B is a diagram showing an example of a high-density UL deployment. In order to expand UL coverage, it is being considered to provide UL reception points as shown in Figure 1B in addition to DL transmission points as shown in Figure 1A. In Figure 1B, a UE receives DL signals from a DL transmission point (TRP/Central TRP/DL TRP/Macro TRP) corresponding to a macro cell, and transmits UL signals to a UL reception point (e.g., a reception point with smaller path loss/reception power). However, the UE may also be capable of performing UL transmission to a DL transmission point.

 図1BのようなUL高密度配置を用いることにより、図1Aのような一般配置と比べて、パスロスを減少し、ULシグナリング品質を改善し、より高い符号化率を得ることによって、カバレッジとULデータレートの両方を改善することができる。また、UL受信ポイントは、主に受信を行うため、一般的なスモールセルに対応する送受信ポイントと比べて、必要な機能(例えば電力増幅器など)が少なくなり低コストとなり、展開管理が非常に容易になる。 By using a high-density UL configuration like that of Figure 1B, it is possible to reduce path loss, improve UL signaling quality, and obtain a higher coding rate, thereby improving both coverage and UL data rates, compared to a general configuration like that of Figure 1A. Furthermore, since the UL receiving point primarily performs reception, it requires fewer functions (such as power amplifiers) and is therefore less costly than a transmission/reception point corresponding to a typical small cell, making deployment management much easier.

(シナリオ2:HetNetにおけるDL TRPとUL TRPのデカップリング)
 本開示では、マクロBase Station(BS)(DL TRP)とマイクロBS(UL TRP)を用いたHeterogeneous Network(HetNet)が適用されてもよい(図2)。通常のHetNetでは、マクロBSとマイクロBSの送信電力は異なる。また、最適なDLカバレッジと最適なULカバレッジは異なる。例えば、DLカバレッジはRSRPによって決定され、ULカバレッジはパスロス(PL)によって決定される。
(Scenario 2: Decoupling of DL TRP and UL TRP in HetNet)
In the present disclosure, a Heterogeneous Network (HetNet) using a macro Base Station (BS) (DL TRP) and a micro BS (UL TRP) may be applied (see FIG. 2). In a typical HetNet, the transmission power of the macro BS and the micro BS is different. Also, the optimal DL coverage and the optimal UL coverage are different. For example, the DL coverage is determined by the RSRP, and the UL coverage is determined by the path loss (PL).

 図2の例では、UEは、マクロBSの最適なDLカバレッジとマイクロBSの最適なULカバレッジに含まれる。この場合、UEはマクロBSからDLを受信し、マイクロBSにULを送信することができる。ただし、UEは、一部の参照信号/チャネル(例えば、DL CSIの取得に使用される、用途(usage)がAntenna switching(AS)であるSRS)を、マクロBSに送信してもよい。したがって、UEは、このシナリオでは2つのタイミングアドバンス(Timing Advance(TA))を必要とする可能性がある。なお、ASのSRSは、チャネルのレシプロシティを使って、SRSの受信に基づき、基地局(マクロBS)がDLのCSI測定を行う(例:DLのMIMOプリコーダーの決定を行う)ためのものであるためマクロBSに対して送信される。一方、用途がCodebook/Non-codebookであるSRSは、PUSCHのプリコーダー/ビーム決定のために用いられるため、マイクロBSに対して送信される。 In the example shown in Figure 2, the UE is included in the optimal DL coverage of the macro BS and the optimal UL coverage of the micro BS. In this case, the UE can receive DL from the macro BS and transmit UL to the micro BS. However, the UE may transmit some reference signals/channels (e.g., SRS with Antenna Switching (AS) usage, used to acquire DL CSI) to the macro BS. Therefore, the UE may require two Timing Advances (TAs) in this scenario. Note that the AS SRS is transmitted to the macro BS because it allows the base station (macro BS) to measure DL CSI (e.g., determine the DL MIMO precoder) based on the SRS reception using channel reciprocity. On the other hand, the Codebook/Non-codebook SRS is transmitted to the micro BS because it is used for PUSCH precoder/beam determination.

 HetNetでは、もしマイクロBSにDL送信能力があっても、ほとんどの時間DLをオフにすれば、マイクロBSのエネルギーを節約することができる。この場合、マイクロBSの機能は、ULのみのTRP(UL受信ポイント)と同様である。 In a HetNet, even if a micro BS has DL transmission capability, it can save energy by turning off DL most of the time. In this case, the functionality of the micro BS is similar to that of a UL-only TRP (UL Reception Point).

(用途(usage)がビーム管理(beam management)であるSRS)
 Rel.15以降では、DL RSに依存しないULビーム管理のために、ビーム管理(beam management)という用途(usage)のSRSをサポートしている。しかし、ビーム管理SRSの空間関係/TCI状態はUEの実装次第であるという問題がある。例えば、定期的なSRSリソースセット内の同じSRSリソースIDであっても、空間関係/TCI状態が変更される可能性がある。また、この機能は、DL-RSとのより良いビームコレスポンデンスを得るために使用され得る。そのため、従来のビーム管理をUL受信ポイントに適用した場合、適切なULビーム管理が実施できない可能性がある。
(SRS whose usage is beam management)
Rel. 15 and later support the use of SRS for beam management, which is independent of DL RSs. However, the spatial relationship/TCI status of the beam management SRS is dependent on the UE implementation. For example, even for the same SRS resource ID within a periodic SRS resource set, the spatial relationship/TCI status may change. This feature can also be used to obtain better beam correspondence with DL-RSs. Therefore, applying conventional beam management to the UL receiving point may result in inappropriate UL beam management.

(分析)
 上述のように、将来の無線通信システムにおいて、ULカバレッジの拡大のために、一般的な送受信ポイントに加えて、UL受信ポイントを設けることが検討されている。また、マクロBase Station(BS)とマイクロBSを用いたUL高密度配置/Heterogeneous Network(HetNet)などが検討されている。
(analysis)
As mentioned above, in order to expand UL coverage in future wireless communication systems, it is being considered to provide UL receiving points in addition to general transmitting and receiving points. Also, UL high-density deployment/Heterogeneous Network (HetNet) using macro Base Stations (BS) and micro BSs is being considered.

 しかしながら、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するULビーム管理をどのように実施するかについて、明らかになっていない。これにより、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するUL送信を適切に実施できず、通信スループットが低下するおそれがある。 However, it is not clear how UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs should be performed. This could result in inappropriate UL transmission to UL receiving points/micro BSs, resulting in reduced communication throughput.

 そこで、本発明者らは、UL受信ポイント/マイクロBSに対するULビーム管理を適切に実施できる無線通信方法を着想した。 The inventors therefore came up with a wireless communication method that can properly perform UL beam management for UL receiving points/micro BSs.

 以下、本開示に係る実施形態について、図面を参照して詳細に説明する。各実施形態に係る無線通信方法は、それぞれ単独で適用されてもよいし、組み合わせて適用されてもよい。 Embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. The wireless communication methods according to the embodiments may be applied independently or in combination.

(各種読み替え)
 本開示において、文章中の”()”で囲まれた文言は、その直前の文言についての説明(例えば、スペルの説明)、言い換え、具体例、補足説明などを示してもよい。また、本開示において、文章中の”[]”で囲まれた文言は、これを含めて文章全体の意味が解釈されてもよいし、これを含めずに(無視して)文章全体の意味が解釈されてもよい。なお、”()”、”[]”は、これら以外の用途/意味で用いられてもよい。
(Various reading changes)
In the present disclosure, a word enclosed in "( )" in a sentence may indicate an explanation of the word immediately preceding it (for example, an explanation of spelling), a paraphrase, a specific example, a supplementary explanation, etc. Also, in the present disclosure, a word enclosed in "[ ]" in a sentence may be interpreted including the word in the meaning of the entire sentence, or may be interpreted excluding the word in the meaning of the entire sentence (ignoring the word in the meaning of the entire sentence). Note that "( )" and "[ ]" may also be used for purposes/meanings other than those mentioned above.

 本開示において、「A/B」及び「A及びBの少なくとも一方」は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「A/B/C」は、「A、B及びCの少なくとも1つ」を意味してもよい。 In this disclosure, "A/B" and "at least one of A and B" may be interpreted interchangeably. Also, in this disclosure, "A/B/C" may mean "at least one of A, B, and C."

 本開示において、通知、アクティベート、ディアクティベート、指示(又は指定(indicate))、選択(select)、設定(configure)、更新(update)、決定(determine)などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、サポートする、制御する、制御できる、動作する、動作できるなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as notify, activate, deactivate, indicate (or indicate), select, configure, update, and determine may be read interchangeably. In this disclosure, terms such as support, control, controllable, operate, and operateable may be read interchangeably.

 本開示において、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control(RRC))、RRCパラメータ、RRCメッセージ、上位レイヤパラメータ、フィールド、情報要素(Information Element(IE))、設定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、Medium Access Control制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))、更新コマンド、アクティベーション/ディアクティベーションコマンドなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, Radio Resource Control (RRC), RRC parameters, RRC messages, upper layer parameters, fields, information elements (IEs), settings, etc. may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, Medium Access Control control elements (MAC Control Elements (CEs)), update commands, activation/deactivation commands, etc. may be interchangeable.

 本開示において、上位レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報、その他のメッセージ(例えば、測位用プロトコル(例えば、NR Positioning Protocol A(NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol(LPP))メッセージなどの、コアネットワークからのメッセージ)などのいずれか、又はこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, higher layer signaling may be, for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling, broadcast information, other messages (e.g., messages from the core network such as positioning protocol (e.g., NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa)/LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP)) messages), or a combination of these.

 本開示において、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(MAC CE))、MAC Protocol Data Unit(PDU)などを用いてもよい。ブロードキャスト情報は、例えば、マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))、最低限のシステム情報(Remaining Minimum System Information(RMSI))、その他のシステム情報(Other System Information(OSI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, MAC signaling may use, for example, a MAC Control Element (MAC CE), a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU), etc. Broadcast information may be, for example, a Master Information Block (MIB), a System Information Block (SIB), Remaining Minimum System Information (RMSI), Other System Information (OSI), etc.

 本開示において、物理レイヤシグナリングは、例えば、下りリンク制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上りリンク制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))などであってもよい。 In the present disclosure, physical layer signaling may be, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI), etc.

 本開示において、パネル、UEパネル、パネルグループ、ビーム、ビームグループ、プリコーダ、Uplink(UL)送信エンティティ、送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))、基地局、空間関係情報(Spatial Relation Information(SRI))、空間関係、SRSリソースインディケーター(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))、Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH)、コードワード(Codeword(CW))、トランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))、参照信号(Reference Signal(RS))、アンテナポート(例えば、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))ポート)、アンテナポートグループ(例えば、DMRSポートグループ)、グループ(例えば、空間関係グループ、符号分割多重(Code Division Multiplexing(CDM))グループ、参照信号グループ、CORESETグループ、Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH)グループ、PUCCHリソースグループ)、リソース(例えば、参照信号リソース、SRSリソース)、リソースセット(例えば、参照信号リソースセット)、CORESETプール、下りリンクのTransmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)(DL TCI状態)、上りリンクのTCI状態(UL TCI状態)、統一されたTCI状態(unified TCI state)、共通TCI状態(common TCI state)、擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))、QCL想定などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms panel, UE panel, panel group, beam, beam group, precoder, Uplink (UL) transmitting entity, Transmission/Reception Point (TRP), base station, Spatial Relation Information (SRI), spatial relation, SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), Control Resource Set (CORESET), Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Codeword (CW), Transport Block (TB), Reference Signal (RS), Antenna Port (e.g., Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) port), Antenna Port group (e.g., DMRS port group), group (e.g., spatial relationship group, Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, reference signal group, CORESET group, Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) group, PUCCH resource group), resource (e.g., reference signal resource, SRS resource), resource set (e.g., reference signal resource set), CORESET pool, downlink Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state) (DL TCI state), uplink TCI state (UL TCI state), unified TCI state, common TCI state, Quasi-Co-Location (QCL), QCL assumption, etc. may be read interchangeably.

 UL受信ポイントは、有線又は無線を介して、TRP(例えば、基地局など)又はコアネットワークに接続されてもよい。UL受信ポイントは、ネットワーク(NW)又は基地局として扱われてもよい。UL受信ポイントは、下りリンク(DL)信号(例えばPL値)を送信可能であってもよく、マクロセルを形成する基地局に適用されてもよい。例えば、UL受信ポイントは、下りデータを送信せず、制御信号/チャネルを送信してもよい。 The UL reception point may be connected to a TRP (e.g., a base station) or a core network via wired or wireless connections. The UL reception point may be treated as a network (NW) or a base station. The UL reception point may be capable of transmitting downlink (DL) signals (e.g., PL values) and may be applied to base stations that form a macrocell. For example, the UL reception point may not transmit downlink data, but may transmit control signals/channels.

 本開示において、基地局、TRP、UL受信ポイント、UL TRP、ULのみのTRP(UL only TRP)、マイクロセル、マイクロBS、マイクロTRPは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。UL受信ポイントは、主にUL受信を行う。UL受信ポイントは、UL受信のみ行ってもよいし、UL受信およびDL送信を行ってもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms base station, TRP, UL receiving point, UL TRP, UL only TRP, micro cell, micro BS, and micro TRP may be interchangeable. An UL receiving point primarily performs UL reception. An UL receiving point may perform only UL reception, or may perform UL reception and DL transmission.

 本開示において、基地局、TRP、DL送信ポイント、DL TRP、DLのみのTRP(DL only TRP)、UL/DL TRP、マクロセル、マクロBS、マクロTRP、セントラルTRPは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。DL送信ポイントは、主にDL送信を行う。DL送信ポイントは、DL送信のみ行ってもよいし、UL受信およびDL送信を行ってもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms base station, TRP, DL transmission point, DL TRP, DL only TRP, UL/DL TRP, macro cell, macro BS, macro TRP, and central TRP may be interchangeable. A DL transmission point primarily performs DL transmission. A DL transmission point may perform only DL transmission, or may perform UL reception and DL transmission.

 本開示において、UL高密度配置、分散(distributed)TRPモード、送信/受信ポイントの分離位置(separated location)モード、分散送信/受信モード、分離(separated)TRPモード、TRPタイプ1、TRPタイプ2、TRPタイプA、TRPタイプB、は互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, UL high density deployment, distributed TRP mode, separated location mode of transmitting/receiving points, distributed transmitting/receiving mode, separated TRP mode, TRP type 1, TRP type 2, TRP type A, and TRP type B may be read interchangeably.

 本開示では、シングルTRP、マルチDCIのマルチTRP、シングルDCIのマルチTRP、上記シナリオ1またはシナリオ2の少なくとも1つが前提であってもよい。 This disclosure may be based on at least one of single TRP, multi-TRP with multi-DCI, multi-TRP with single DCI, Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 above.

 本開示において、主にUL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理について説明するが、図2のマイクロBSに対するULビーム管理についても同様であってもよい。ULビーム管理、ULビームスイーピング、ULビーム決定/選択は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, UL beam management for UL reception points will be mainly described, but the same may also be applied to UL beam management for the micro BS in Figure 2. UL beam management, UL beam sweeping, and UL beam determination/selection may be read interchangeably.

(無線通信方法)
<第1の実施形態>
 UEは、UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる、特定の用途(usage)が設定されたSRSの設定情報(例えばSRS-Config)をDL送信ポイントまたはUL受信ポイントから受信してもよい。UEは、その設定情報に基づいて、UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御してもよい。特定の用途(新たな用途)は、従来のビーム管理、CB、NCB、アンテナスイッチングとは異なる用途であってもよい。これにより、gNB/NWは、他の用途とUL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のためのSRSを区別することができる。
(Wireless communication method)
First Embodiment
The UE may receive configuration information (e.g., SRS-Config) for an SRS configured for a specific usage, used for UL beam management to a UL reception point, from a DL transmission point or a UL reception point. The UE may control SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the configuration information. The specific usage (new usage) may be a usage different from conventional beam management, CB, NCB, and antenna switching. This allows the gNB/NW to distinguish the SRS for UL beam management to a UL reception point from other usages.

<<オプション1>>
 新しい用途に対応するSRSリソースセット数が設定されてもよい。SRSリソースセット数として、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション1-1:最大1つ。
オプション1-2:最大2つ。この場合、異なるSRSリソースセットは異なるUEアンテナパネルに対応してもよい。
オプション1-3:3以上(例えば、8)。
<<Option 1>>
The number of SRS resource sets corresponding to the new application may be set. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied as the number of SRS resource sets:
Option 1-1: Maximum 1.
Option 1-2: Maximum of 2. In this case, different SRS resource sets may correspond to different UE antenna panels.
Option 1-3: 3 or more (e.g., 8).

<<オプション2>>
 新しい用途に対応するSRSリソースセットごとのSRSリソース数が設定されてもよい。SRSリソースセットごとのSRSリソース数として、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション2-1:最大1つ。
オプション2-2:最大2つ。
オプション2-3:3つ以上。
<<Option 2>>
The number of SRS resources for each SRS resource set corresponding to the new application may be configured. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied as the number of SRS resources for each SRS resource set:
Option 2-1: Maximum 1.
Option 2-2: Maximum two.
Option 2-3: Three or more.

 設定されるSRSリソースセットが異なる場合、1セットあたりのSRSリソース数の制限も異なってもよい。 If different SRS resource sets are configured, the limit on the number of SRS resources per set may also be different.

<<オプション3>>
 新しい用途に対応するSRSリソース/リソースセットについて、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション3-1:UEは、異なるSRSリソースセットにおいて、同じビームで異なるSRSリソースを送信してもよい。gNBは、異なるSRSリソース間で受信ビームスイーピングを実行してもよい。異なるSRSリソースセットは、ある1つのSRSリソースセットが周期的もしくはセミパーシステント送信されている場合の、異なる周期において送信されるSRSリソースセットを意味してもよい。
オプション3-2:UEは、同じSRSリソースセット内の異なるSRSリソースを同じビームで送信してもよい。gNBは、異なるSRSリソース間で受信ビームスイープを実行してもよい。
オプション3-3:UEは、同じビームで、同じSRSリソースの異なる繰り返し送信を実施してもよい。gNBは、異なるSRSリソース間で受信ビームスイーピングを実行してもよい。
<< Option 3 >>
For the SRS resource/resource set corresponding to the new application, for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 3-1: The UE may transmit different SRS resources in the same beam in different SRS resource sets. The gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between the different SRS resources. The different SRS resource sets may refer to SRS resource sets transmitted at different periods when a certain SRS resource set is transmitted periodically or semi-persistently.
Option 3-2: The UE may transmit different SRS resources in the same SRS resource set on the same beam, and the gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between the different SRS resources.
Option 3-3: The UE may perform different repeated transmissions of the same SRS resource on the same beam. The gNB may perform receive beam sweeping between different SRS resources.

<<オプション4>>
 新しい用途は、既存の用途と組み合わせて利用されてもよい。例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション4-1:UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とDL TRP用のULビーム管理(用途「beam management」)とが組み合わせて適用されてもよい。または、新たな用途は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とDL TRP用のULビーム管理の両方を指示してもよい。
オプション4-2:UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とCB PUSCH用のCSI(用途「codebook」)とが組み合わせて適用されてもよい。または、新たな用途は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とCB PUSCH用のCSI(用途「codebook」)の両方を指示してもよい。
オプション4-3:UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とNCB PUSCH用のCSI(用途「noncodebook」)とが組み合わせて適用されてもよい。または、新たな用途は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とNCB PUSCH用のCSI(用途「noncodebook」)の両方を指示してもよい。
オプション4-4:UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とDL用のCSI(用途「antenna switching」)とが組み合わせて適用されてもよい。または、新たな用途は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理とDL用のCSI(用途「antenna switching」)の両方を指示してもよい。
<< Option 4 >>
The new application may be used in combination with the existing application. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 4-1: UL beam management for UL reception points and UL beam management for DL TRPs (application "beam management") may be applied in combination, or a new application may indicate both UL beam management for UL reception points and UL beam management for DL TRPs.
Option 4-2: UL beam management for the UL reception point and CSI for the CB PUSCH (application "codebook") may be applied in combination, or a new application may indicate both UL beam management for the UL reception point and CSI for the CB PUSCH (application "codebook").
Option 4-3: UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for NCB PUSCH (use "noncodebook") may be applied in combination, or a new use may indicate both UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for NCB PUSCH (use "noncodebook").
Option 4-4: UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for DL (application "antenna switching") may be applied in combination, or a new application may indicate both UL beam management for UL reception points and CSI for DL (application "antenna switching").

<<オプション5>>
 UEは、従来の用途(ビーム管理、CB、NCB、またはアンテナスイッチング)に加え、UL受信ポイント用であることを示すための新たな指示を受信してもよい。例えば従来の用途がUL受信ポイント用であるかを示すフラグ(例えば、Flag_UL TRP)が指示されてもよい。または、従来の用途がUL受信ポイント用であるかを暗黙的に示す他のパラメータ(例えば、Timing Advance Group(TAG) ID)が利用されてもよい。このフラグ/パラメータは、SRS設定毎、SRSリソースセット毎、またはSRSリソース毎に指示されてもよい。
<< Option 5 >>
The UE may receive a new indication to indicate that the legacy use is for an UL reception point in addition to the legacy use (beam management, CB, NCB, or antenna switching). For example, a flag (e.g., Flag_UL TRP) indicating whether the legacy use is for an UL reception point may be indicated. Alternatively, another parameter (e.g., Timing Advance Group (TAG) ID) that implicitly indicates whether the legacy use is for an UL reception point may be used. This flag/parameter may be indicated per SRS configuration, per SRS resource set, or per SRS resource.

 第1の実施形態によれば、UEは、UL受信ポイントに対応する特定の用途に基づいて、適切にUL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御する。 According to the first embodiment, the UE appropriately controls SRS transmission to an UL reception point based on the specific application corresponding to the UL reception point.

<第2の実施形態>
 UEは、ULチャネルサウンディング(測定)に加え、UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにコードブック(CB) SRS送信(CBが用途であるSRS送信)を用いてもよい。例えば、特定の用途「コードブック」が設定された場合、UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御し、UL受信ポイントのビーム管理を実施してもよい。この場合、SRS送信に必要なULリソースの総量を削減することができる。
Second Embodiment
In addition to UL channel sounding (measurement), the UE may use codebook (CB) SRS transmission (SRS transmission with CB as its purpose) for UL beam management for UL reception points. For example, when a specific purpose "codebook" is configured, the UE may control SRS transmission for UL reception points and perform beam management for the UL reception points. In this case, the total amount of UL resources required for SRS transmission can be reduced.

<<オプション1>>
 SRSリソースセット数として、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<<Option 1>>
As the number of SRS resource sets, for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:

オプション1-1:最大1つ。この場合、SRSリソースセットは複数のSRSリソースを有するように設定されてもよい。 Option 1-1: Maximum of 1. In this case, the SRS resource set may be configured to include multiple SRS resources.

オプション1-2:最大2つ。この場合、2つのSRSリソースセットのそれぞれは、複数のTRPのうちのいずれか1つ、または複数のUEパネルのうちのいずれか1つに対応してもよい。TRPの少なくとも1つは、UL受信ポイントであってもよい。 Option 1-2: Up to two. In this case, each of the two SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point.

 図3は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-2の例を示す図である。SRSリソースセット#0は、マクロTRPに対応し、SRSリソースセット#1は、UL受信ポイントに対応してもよい。SRSリソースセット#0は、ULパネル1に対応し、SRSリソースセット#1は、ULパネル2に対応してもよい。 Figure 3 shows an example of option 1-2 of the second embodiment. SRS resource set #0 may correspond to a macro TRP, and SRS resource set #1 may correspond to a UL reception point. SRS resource set #0 may correspond to UL panel 1, and SRS resource set #1 may correspond to UL panel 2.

オプション1-3:最大3つ。この場合、3つのSRSリソースセットのそれぞれは、複数のTRPのうちのいずれか1つ、または複数のUEパネルのうちのいずれか1つに対応してもよい。TRPの少なくとも1つは、UL受信ポイントであってもよい。例えば、3つのSRSリソースセットは、それぞれ、マクロTRPおよび対応するUEパネル、別のマクロTRP用および対応する別のUEパネル、UL受信ポイントおよび対応するUEパネルに対応していてもよい。 Options 1-3: Up to three. In this case, each of the three SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point. For example, the three SRS resource sets may correspond to a macro TRP and its corresponding UE panel, another macro TRP and its corresponding UE panel, or an UL reception point and its corresponding UE panel, respectively.

 図4は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-3の例を示す図である。SRSリソースセット#0は、マクロTRPおよびULパネル1に対応し、SRSリソースセット#1は、マクロTRPおよびULパネル2に対応し、SRSリソースセット#2は、UL受信ポイント(およびUEパネル1または2)に対応してもよい。 Figure 4 shows examples of options 1-3 of the second embodiment. SRS resource set #0 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 1, SRS resource set #1 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 2, and SRS resource set #2 may correspond to the UL reception point (and UE panel 1 or 2).

オプション1-4:最大4つ。この場合、3つのSRSリソースセットのそれぞれは、複数のTRPのうちのいずれか1つ、または複数のUEパネルのうちのいずれか1つに対応してもよい。TRPの少なくとも1つは、UL受信ポイントであってもよい。 Options 1-4: Up to four. In this case, each of the three SRS resource sets may correspond to any one of multiple TRPs or any one of multiple UE panels. At least one of the TRPs may be an UL reception point.

 図5は、第2の実施形態のオプション1-4の例を示す図である。SRSリソースセット#0は、マクロTRPおよびULパネル1に対応し、SRSリソースセット#1は、マクロTRPおよびULパネル2に対応し、SRSリソースセット#2は、UL受信ポイントおよびUEパネル1に対応し、SRSリソースセット#3は、UL受信ポイントおよびUEパネル2に対応してもよい。 Figure 5 shows examples of options 1-4 of the second embodiment. SRS resource set #0 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 1, SRS resource set #1 may correspond to the macro TRP and UL panel 2, SRS resource set #2 may correspond to the UL reception point and UE panel 1, and SRS resource set #3 may correspond to the UL reception point and UE panel 2.

オプション1-5:最大X(例えば、X≧5)。
オプション1-5-1:固定値(例:5、6、8など)。固定値は、定義されてもよい。
オプション1-5-2:RRCシグナリングによって数が設定される。
オプション1-5-3:DL MAC CE/DCIにより数が指示される。
オプション1-5-4:これらの組み合わせ。例えば、仕様/RRCシグナリングによって設定されたリストの中から、DL MAC CE/DCIにより数が指示されてもよい。
Options 1-5: Maximum X (e.g., X≧5).
Option 1-5-1: Fixed value (e.g. 5, 6, 8, etc.) Fixed values may be defined.
Option 1-5-2: The number is set by RRC signaling.
Option 1-5-3: The number is indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI.
Option 1-5-4: A combination of these. For example, the number may be indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI from a list set by the specifications/RRC signaling.

<<オプション1’>>
 ULをスケジューリングするDCIのフィールドについて、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション1’-1:SRSリソースセット指示(SRS resource set indicator)フィールドについて、既存のフィールドが適用されてもよいし、UL受信ポイントに対応する新たなビット(追加ビット)が適用されてもよい。
オプション1’-2:マクロTRPかUL受信ポイントかを指示する追加フィールドが適用されてもよい。
<<Option 1>>
For the fields of the DCI scheduling the UL, for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 1'-1: For the SRS resource set indicator field, an existing field may be applied, or new bits (additional bits) corresponding to UL reception points may be applied.
Option 1'-2: An additional field may be applied indicating whether it is a macro TRP or a UL reception point.

 図6は、第2の実施形態のオプション1’-1のSRSリソースセット指示フィールドの第1の例を示す図である。図6の例では、既存の2ビットを用いた4つのコードポイントが適用される。例えばコードポイント2がUL受信ポイント(UL-only TRP)の適用を示す。 Figure 6 shows a first example of the SRS resource set indication field for option 1'-1 of the second embodiment. In the example of Figure 6, four code points using the existing two bits are applied. For example, code point 2 indicates the application of a UL reception point (UL-only TRP).

 図7は、第2の実施形態のプション1’-1のSRSリソースセット指示フィールドの第2の例を示す図である。図7の例では、3ビットを用いた8つのコードポイントが適用される。例えばコードポイント4~7が、UL受信ポイント(UL-only TRP)の適用を示す。 Figure 7 shows a second example of the SRS resource set indication field for option 1'-1 of the second embodiment. In the example of Figure 7, eight code points using three bits are applied. For example, code points 4 to 7 indicate the application of UL reception points (UL-only TRPs).

<<オプション2>>
 SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソース数(ULビーム管理用)について、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション2-1:最大2。
オプション2-2:最大4。
オプション2-3:最大8。
オプション2-4:最大X。
オプション2-4-1:固定値(例:9、10、12、14、16など)。
オプション2-4-2:RRCシグナリングによって数が設定される。
オプション2-4-3:DL MAC CE/DCIにより数が指示される。
オプション2-4-4:これらの組み合わせ。例えば、仕様/RRCシグナリングによって設定されたリストの中から、DL MAC CE/DCIにより数が指示されてもよい。
<<Option 2>>
Regarding the number of SRS resources per SRS resource set (for UL beam management), for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 2-1: Maximum 2.
Option 2-2: Maximum 4.
Option 2-3: Maximum 8.
Options 2-4: Max X.
Option 2-4-1: Fixed value (e.g. 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, etc.).
Option 2-4-2: The number is set by RRC signaling.
Option 2-4-3: The number is indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI.
Option 2-4-4: A combination of these. For example, the number may be indicated by the DL MAC CE/DCI from a list set by the specifications/RRC signaling.

 オプション2-3について、以下の例1,例2が適用されてもよい。オプション2-4について、以下の例3が適用されてもよい。 For options 2-3, examples 1 and 2 below may be applied. For options 2-4, example 3 below may be applied.

例1:合計8リソースが設定される。8リソースのうち6リソースがULビーム管理に使用される。残りの2リソースはRel.15 CB PUSCH送信と同様に使用される。 Example 1: A total of 8 resources are configured. 6 of the 8 resources are used for UL beam management. The remaining 2 resources are used in the same way as Rel. 15 CB PUSCH transmission.

例2:合計8リソースが設定される。8リソースのうち4リソースがULビーム管理に使用される。残りの4リソースはRel.16 ULフルパワーMIMO送信モード2機能に使用される。 Example 2: A total of 8 resources are configured. 4 of the 8 resources are used for UL beam management. The remaining 4 resources are used for Rel. 16 UL full power MIMO transmit mode 2 functionality.

例3:合計16個のリソースが設定されている。リソースが複数のグループに分けられ、各グループは1つのTRPに対応し、4つのリソースを含む。各グループの4リソースは、ULフルパワーMIMO送信モード2機能に使用される。 Example 3: A total of 16 resources are configured. The resources are divided into multiple groups, each corresponding to one TRP and containing four resources. The four resources in each group are used for UL full power MIMO transmission mode 2 function.

<<オプション2’>>
 ULがスケジューリングするDCIにおけるDCIフィールドにおいて、SRIフィールドのビット幅が拡張(例:4ビット)されてもよい。これにより、増加したSRSリソースが指示されてもよい。
<<Option 2'>>
In the DCI field of the UL-scheduled DCI, the bit width of the SRI field may be extended (e.g., to 4 bits), thereby indicating increased SRS resources.

<<オプション3>>
 設定される1以上のSRSリソース/SRSリソースセットに関して、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション3-1:同じREが設定される。
オプション3-2:スロット内で同じ/異なるOFDMシンボルが設定される。
オプション3-3:同じ/異なる巡回シフトが設定される。
オプション3-4:同じ/異なるTCI状態(QCL想定)が設定される。
<< Option 3 >>
With respect to one or more SRS resources/SRS resource sets to be configured, for example, at least one of the following options may apply:
Option 3-1: The same RE is set.
Option 3-2: The same/different OFDM symbols are set within a slot.
Option 3-3: Same/different cyclic shifts are set.
Option 3-4: The same/different TCI conditions (QCL assumptions) are set.

 オプション3-1~3-4について、設定されたSRSリソース/SRSリソースセットの一部(設定された全てのリソース/リソースセットではない)、または全てのSRSリソース/SRSリソースセットに対して適用されもよい。 Options 3-1 to 3-4 may be applied to some of the configured SRS resources/SRS resource sets (not all configured resources/resource sets), or to all SRS resources/SRS resource sets.

<<オプション4>>
 UEは、UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のために、SRSリソース毎のビームを決定してもよい。
<< Option 4 >>
The UE may determine a beam for each SRS resource for UL beam management to the UL reception point.

 第2の実施形態によれば、従来の用途「コードブック」を用いてUL受信ポイントに対応するビーム管理を実施することができるため、用途の仕様変更をせずに、適切にUL受信ポイントに対応するビーム管理を実施できる。 According to the second embodiment, beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed using the conventional application "codebook," so beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed appropriately without changing the application specifications.

<第3の実施形態>
 UEは、ULチャネルサウンディング(測定)に加え、UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにノンコードブック(NCB) SRS送信(NCBが用途であるSRS送信)を用いてもよい。例えば、特定の用途「ノンコードブック」が設定された場合、UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御し、UL受信ポイントのビーム管理を実施してもよい。この場合、SRS送信に必要なULリソースの総量を削減することができる。
Third Embodiment
In addition to UL channel sounding (measurement), the UE may use non-codebook (NCB) SRS transmission (SRS transmission with NCB as its purpose) for UL beam management for UL reception points. For example, when a specific purpose "non-codebook" is configured, the UE may control SRS transmission for UL reception points and perform beam management for the UL reception points. In this case, the total amount of UL resources required for SRS transmission can be reduced.

<<オプション1>>
 SRSリソースセット数として、第2の実施形態のオプション1内のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<<Option 1>>
As the number of SRS resource sets, at least one of the options in option 1 of the second embodiment may be applied.

<<オプション2>>
 SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソース数(ULビーム管理用)について、例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<<Option 2>>
Regarding the number of SRS resources per SRS resource set (for UL beam management), for example, at least one of the following options may be applied:

オプション2-1:最大4×N。Nは、TRPの数(マクロTRP/DL TRP、UL受信ポイント/UL TRPの合計)に対応してもよい。例えば、1つのマクロTRPおよび1つのUL受信ポイントが適用される場合、SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソース数は、例えば、4×2=8となる。 Option 2-1: Up to 4 x N. N may correspond to the number of TRPs (total of macro TRPs/DL TRPs, UL reception points/UL TRPs). For example, if one macro TRP and one UL reception point are applied, the number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is, for example, 4 x 2 = 8.

オプション2-2:最大4×N。Nは、ULビームスイーピングのビーム数に対応してもよい。例えば、NCB用に4ポート、ULビーム掃引用に4ビームが適用される場合、SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソース数は、4×4=16となる。 Option 2-2: Up to 4 x N. N may correspond to the number of beams for UL beam sweeping. For example, if 4 ports are used for NCB and 4 beams are used for UL beam sweeping, the number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is 4 x 4 = 16.

 オプション2-1および2-2の「4」は、UEのノンコードブックPUSCH送信のための最大MIMOレイヤを意味してもよい。オプション2-1および2-2の「4」は、他の数字(例えば8)に置き換えられてもよい。また、「N」は、SRSリソースセット内のSRSリソース設定用のリソースグループの数を意味してもよい。複数SRSリソースの同時送信の可否、および可能である場合の最大同時送信可能数は、全リソースに対して、またはリソースグループ毎に決定されてもよい。 The "4" in options 2-1 and 2-2 may refer to the maximum MIMO layer for non-codebook PUSCH transmission by the UE. The "4" in options 2-1 and 2-2 may be replaced with another number (e.g., 8). Furthermore, "N" may refer to the number of resource groups for SRS resource configuration within an SRS resource set. Whether simultaneous transmission is possible for multiple SRS resources, and if so, the maximum number of possible simultaneous transmissions, may be determined for all resources or for each resource group.

<<オプション3>>
 設定される1以上のSRSリソース/SRSリソースセットに関して、第2の実施形態のオプション3内のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<< Option 3 >>
For one or more SRS resources/SRS resource sets to be configured, at least one of the options in option 3 of the second embodiment may be applied.

 第3の実施形態によれば、従来の用途「コードブック」を用いてUL受信ポイントに対応するビーム管理を実施することができるため、用途の仕様変更をせずに、適切にUL受信ポイントに対応するビーム管理を実施できる。 According to the third embodiment, beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed using the conventional application "codebook," so beam management corresponding to UL reception points can be performed appropriately without changing the application specifications.

<第4の実施形態>
 UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理に関して説明する。UL受信ポイントに対するUEのビーム(ULビーム)の決定に関して、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。第4の実施形態は、例えば、第1~第3の実施形態で示した特定の用途が設定された場合に、実施されてもよい。
<Fourth embodiment>
The following describes UL beam management for a UL reception point. Regarding the determination of the UE's beam (UL beam) for a UL reception point, at least one of the following options may be applied: The fourth embodiment may be implemented, for example, when a specific application shown in the first to third embodiments is set.

<<オプション1>>
 UL受信ポイントに対するULビームの決定は、UEの実装次第であってもよい。
<<Option 1>>
The determination of the UL beam for the UL reception point may be up to the UE implementation.

<<オプション2>>
 UEは、指定されたルールに基づいて、UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定してもよい。以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション2-1:UL受信ポイントに対するULビームは、マクロTRPに対するビームとは異なるビームである。
オプション2-2:UL受信ポイントに対するULビームは、特定の方向に向かうビームである。
オプション2-3:UL受信ポイントに対するULビームは、マクロTRPに対するビームとは逆方向へのビームである。
<<Option 2>>
The UE may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule. At least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 2-1: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a different beam than the beam for the macro TRP.
Option 2-2: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a beam pointing in a specific direction.
Option 2-3: The UL beam for the UL reception point is a beam in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.

 オプション2において、Effective Isotropic Radiated Power(EIRP)に基づくルールが適用されてもよい。例えば、ULビームとして、球面カバレージ要件は満たすが、最小EIRP要件は満たさないビーム/TCI状態/空間関係が適用されてもよい。 In Option 2, rules based on Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) may be applied. For example, for UL beams, a beam/TCI state/spatial relationship may be applied that satisfies the spherical coverage requirement but does not satisfy the minimum EIRP requirement.

 オプション2において、ULビームに対して、ビーム指向性に基づくルールが適用されてもよい。例えば、ULビームとして、マクロTRPに向かう方向と180度異なる方向を指すビーム/TCI状態/空間関係が適用されてもよい。 In option 2, rules based on beam directivity may be applied to the UL beam. For example, a beam/TCI state/spatial relationship that points in a direction 180 degrees different from the direction toward the macro TRP may be applied to the UL beam.

<<オプション3>>
 UEは、NWから送信された設定/指示に基づいて、UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定してもよい。例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション3-1:UEは、受信したRRCシグナリングに基づいて、ULビームを決定してもよい。
オプション3-2:UEは、受信したDL MAC CEに基づいて、ULビームを決定してもよい。
オプション3-3:UEは、受信したDCIに基づいて、ULビームを決定してもよい。
<< Option 3 >>
The UE may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on the configuration/instruction sent from the NW. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied:
Option 3-1: The UE may determine the UL beam based on received RRC signaling.
Option 3-2: The UE may determine the UL beam based on the received DL MAC CE.
Option 3-3: The UE may determine the UL beam based on the received DCI.

 UEは、RRCシグナリングにより複数のULビームの設定を受信し、その複数のULビームの中のいずれかのULビームをアクティブ化/指示するMAC CE/DCIを受信し、アクティブ化/指示されたてULビームを、UL受信ポイントに対するULビームとして決定してもよい。 The UE may receive the configuration of multiple UL beams via RRC signaling, receive a MAC CE/DCI that activates/indicates one of the multiple UL beams, and determine the activated/indicated UL beam as the UL beam for the UL reception point.

 ULビームに対応するRel.17/Rel.18の統一TCI状態フレームワークが適用されてもよい。UEは、設定/指示された統一TCI状態をUL受信ポイントに対するビームに適用してもよい。 The Rel. 17/Rel. 18 unified TCI state framework for UL beams may be applied. The UE may apply the configured/indicated unified TCI state to the beam for the UL reception point.

<<オプション4>>
 UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のために設定される条件/制限として、以下の以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<< Option 4 >>
As conditions/restrictions set for UL beam management to a UL reception point, at least one of the following options may be applied:

オプション4-1:UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のために設定されたSRSリソースに対して、followUnifiedTCI-Stateまたは空間関係が設定されない。このオプションは、UL受信ポイントのビーム管理によるSRSビームがUEの実装次第であることを意味してもよい。このオプションは、従来のSRSと本開示における拡張されたSRSの間で異なるSRSリソースが設定されている場合に適用されてもよい。 Option 4-1: No followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship is configured for the SRS resources configured for UL beam management to the UL reception point. This option may mean that the SRS beam resulting from beam management at the UL reception point is up to the UE implementation. This option may also be applied when different SRS resources are configured between the conventional SRS and the extended SRS of this disclosure.

オプション4-2:UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のために設定されたSRSリソースに対して、followUnifiedTCI-Stateまたは空間関係が設定される。この場合、設定されたfollowUnifiedTCI-Stateまたは空間関係は無視されてもよい。このオプションは、UL受信ポイントのビーム管理によるSRSビームがUEの実装次第であることを意味してもよい。 Option 4-2: The followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship is configured for the SRS resources configured for UL beam management to the UL reception point. In this case, the configured followUnifiedTCI-State or spatial relationship may be ignored. This option may mean that the SRS beam due to beam management of the UL reception point is up to the UE implementation.

 followUnifiedTCI-Stateは、followUnifiedTCI-StateSRSに読み替えられてもよい。followUnifiedTCI-Stateは、RRCパラメータであり、有効(eanbled)に設定されている場合、対応するCORESETにおけるPDCCH受信において、UEは、指示されたDL専用TCIまたはジョイントTCIを適用してもよい。 followUnifiedTCI-State may be read as followUnifiedTCI-StateSRS. followUnifiedTCI-State is an RRC parameter, and when set to enabled, the UE may apply the indicated DL-dedicated TCI or joint TCI when receiving PDCCH in the corresponding CORESET.

 followUnifiedTCI-StateSRSは、RRCパラメータであり、有効(eanbled)に設定されている場合、SRSリソースセットに対して、UEは、指示されたDL専用TCIまたはジョイントTCIを適用してもよい。このパラメータは、ビーム管理用の非周期的なSRS、またはコードブック、ノンコードブック、およびアンテナスイッチングの任意の時間領域動作のSRSに設定されてもよい。 followUnifiedTCI-StateSRS is an RRC parameter that, when set to enabled, allows the UE to apply the indicated DL-dedicated TCI or joint TCI for the SRS resource set. This parameter may be set for aperiodic SRS for beam management, or for SRS for any time-domain operation such as codebook, non-codebook, and antenna switching.

 本実施形態によれば、UEは、UL受信ポイントのための適切なビームをより簡単に、またはより効率的に特定することができる。 According to this embodiment, the UE can more easily or more efficiently identify an appropriate beam for the UL reception point.

<第5の実施形態>
 UEは、UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施してもよい。これにより、例えば、UEの移動によりUL受信ポイントとの距離が変わった場合に、スループットの低下を抑制することができる。
Fifth Embodiment
The UE may switch on and off UL beam management for the UL reception point, which can suppress a decrease in throughput when, for example, the distance to the UL reception point changes due to the movement of the UE.

<<態様5-1>>
 NW(基地局)は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを決定する。そして、UEは、NWから、切り替えを示す設定/指示を受信し、設定/指示に基づいて、ULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施してもよい。例えば、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
<<Aspect 5-1>>
The NW (base station) decides to switch on/off UL beam management for the UL reception point. Then, the UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch from the NW and perform the switch on/off of UL beam management based on the configuration/instruction. For example, at least one of the following options may be applied:

<<<オプション1>>>
 UEは、以下の少なくとも1つの方法で、切り替えを示す設定/指示を受信してもよい。
オプション1-1:UEは、RRCシグナリングにより、切り替えを示す設定/指示を受信してもよい。
オプション1-2:UEは、DL MAC CEにより、切り替えを示す設定/指示を受信してもよい。
オプション1-3:UEは、DCIにより、切り替えを示す設定/指示を受信してもよい。
<<<Option 1>>>
The UE may receive the configuration/indication indicating the switch in at least one of the following ways:
Option 1-1: The UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch via RRC signaling.
Option 1-2: The UE may receive a configuration/indication indicating the switchover via the DL MAC CE.
Option 1-3: The UE may receive a configuration/instruction indicating the switch via DCI.

<<<オプション2>>>
 NWからUEに送信される設定/指示には、以下の少なくとも1つが含まれてもよい。
オプション2-1:UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理をオン/オフするかどうか。
オプション2-2:ULビームスイピーングのためのビーム情報。
<<<Option 2>>>
The settings/instructions sent from the NW to the UE may include at least one of the following:
Option 2-1: Whether to turn on/off UL beam management for the UL receiving point.
Option 2-2: Beam information for UL beam sweeping.

<<<オプション3>>>
 UEが、UL受信ポイントへのULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施するタイミング/条件は、以下の少なくとも1つであってもよい。
オプション3-1:NWからの設定/指示受信後(例えば、受信から所定期間後)。
オプション3-2:NWからの設定/指示受信に対するHARQ ACK送信後(例えば、受信から所定期間後)。
<<<Option 3>>>
The timing/conditions under which the UE switches on/off UL beam management for an UL reception point may be at least one of the following:
Option 3-1: After receiving a setting/instruction from the network (for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed since receiving the setting/instruction).
Option 3-2: After transmitting HARQ ACK in response to receiving a setting/instruction from the network (e.g., after a predetermined period of time after reception).

 オプション3-1、3-2の所定期間は、特定のスロット数または特定のシンボル数として定義されてもよい。 The specified period for options 3-1 and 3-2 may be defined as a specific number of slots or a specific number of symbols.

 切り替え動作例として、以下の例1または例2が適用されてもよい。 As an example of the switching operation, the following example 1 or example 2 may be applied.

<<<例1>>>
 第2の実施形態/第3の実施形態のUL受信ポイントへのULビームスイーピング用の新しいCB/NCB SRSに相当する新しいSRSの用途が適用されてもよい。例えば、SRSリソースセットに、レガシーCB、レガシーNCB,新しいCB、新しいNCBが個別に設定されてもよい。
<<<Example 1>>>
The use of the new SRS corresponding to the new CB/NCB SRS for UL beam sweeping to the UL reception point in the second embodiment/third embodiment may be applied. For example, the legacy CB, the legacy NCB, the new CB, and the new NCB may be individually configured in the SRS resource set.

 txConfigには、既存のCB、NCBに加えて、UL受信ポイントに対応するCB(例えば、codebook-RxonlyTRP)、UL受信ポイントに対応するNCB(例えば、nonCodebook-RxonlyTRP)の少なくとも1つが設定されてもよい。 In addition to the existing CB and NCB, txConfig may also be configured with at least one of a CB corresponding to a UL reception point (e.g., codebook-RxonlyTRP) and an NCB corresponding to a UL reception point (e.g., nonCodebook-RxonlyTRP).

 UL受信ポイントに対応するCBが設定された場合、第2の実施形態の動作が実行されてもよい。UL受信ポイントに対応するNCBが設定された場合、第2の実施形態の動作が実行されてもよい。CBが設定された場合、従来のCB PUSCHの動作が実行されたもよい。NCBが設定された場合、従来のNCB PUSCHの動作が実行されたもよい。 When a CB corresponding to an UL reception point is configured, the operation of the second embodiment may be performed. When an NCB corresponding to an UL reception point is configured, the operation of the second embodiment may be performed. When a CB is configured, the operation of a conventional CB PUSCH may be performed. When an NCB is configured, the operation of a conventional NCB PUSCH may be performed.

<<<例2>>>
 SRS用途の既存のCB/NCBの設定は、UL受信ポイントへのULビームスイーピング用に適用されてもよい。例えば、既存のCB/NCBが設定された場合に、第2の実施形態/第3の実施形態の動作が適用されてもよい。
<<<Example 2>>>
The existing CB/NCB settings for SRS may be applied for UL beam sweeping to the UL reception point. For example, when the existing CB/NCB is set, the operation of the second embodiment/third embodiment may be applied.

 SRSリソースセット用のレガシーCB、NCBが個別に設定されてもよい。その場合、UL受信ポイントを使用する動作としない動作を区別するための特定のRRCパラメータ(例えば、withRxOnlyTRP)が設定されてもよい。特定のRRCパラメータが設定されている場合、UEは、UL受信ポイントに対するULビームスイーピングを考慮して、CBのSRSまたはNCBのSRSの送信を実行してもよい(例えば、第2の実施形態/第3の実施形態の動作)。特定のRRCパラメータが設定されていない場合、UEは、従来のCBのSRSまたはNCBのSRSの送信を実行してもよい。 The legacy CB and NCB for the SRS resource set may be configured separately. In this case, a specific RRC parameter (e.g., withRxOnlyTRP) may be configured to distinguish between operation using and not using the UL reception point. When the specific RRC parameter is configured, the UE may transmit the CB SRS or the NCB SRS, taking into account UL beam sweeping for the UL reception point (e.g., operation of the second/third embodiment). When the specific RRC parameter is not configured, the UE may transmit the conventional CB SRS or the NCB SRS.

 UEは、レガシーULビーム管理とUL受信ポイント用の拡張されたULビーム管理との動的切り替えを指示するMAC CE/DCIを受信し、動的替えを実施してもよい。レガシーULビーム管理に切り替えること(適用されること)は、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理がオフになることを意味してもよい。 The UE may receive a MAC CE/DCI instructing dynamic switching between legacy UL beam management and enhanced UL beam management for the UL reception point, and may perform the dynamic switching. Switching to (applying) legacy UL beam management may mean that UL beam management for the UL reception point is turned off.

 レガシーULビーム管理と、UL受信ポイント用の拡張ULビーム管理への動的切り替え(例えば、MAC CE/DCI指示による切り替えなど)が行われる場合、用途がCB/NCBであるSRSリソース/リソースセットやリソースを変更する必要がある。例えば、従来は、CB用のSRSリソースは最大2つであるが、UL受信ポイント用のビームスイープの場合、より多くのSRSリソースを設定可能とすることが好ましい。そのため、以下の例1~例3の少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。 When dynamic switching between legacy UL beam management and extended UL beam management for UL reception points (for example, switching based on MAC CE/DCI instructions) is performed, it is necessary to change the SRS resource/resource set or resources used for CB/NCB. For example, conventionally, there are a maximum of two SRS resources for CB, but in the case of beam sweep for UL reception points, it is preferable to be able to set more SRS resources. Therefore, at least one of the following examples 1 to 3 may be applied.

例1:動的切り替えが行われる場合(例えばレガシーULビーム管理に切り替える場合)、UEは、SRSリソースIDが大きいSRSリソースを無視し、適切な数のSRSリソース(例えば2つ)のみ考慮してもよい。
例2:動的切り替えが実行される場合(例えばUL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理に切り替える場合)、UEは、対応するSRSリソースセットに対して設定された全てのSRSリソースにおいてSRSを送信してもよい。
例3:動的切り替えが実行される場合、UEは、対応するSRSリソースセットに対して設定されたSRSリソースのいずれかにおいて、SRSを送信してもよい。
Example 1: When dynamic switching occurs (e.g., when switching to legacy UL beam management), the UE may ignore SRS resources with larger SRS resource IDs and only consider an appropriate number of SRS resources (e.g., two).
Example 2: When dynamic switching is performed (e.g., when switching to UL beam management for a UL reception point), the UE may transmit SRS on all SRS resources configured for the corresponding SRS resource set.
Example 3: When dynamic switching is performed, the UE may transmit SRS on any of the SRS resources configured for the corresponding SRS resource set.

<<態様5-2>>
 UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えはUEによってトリガされてもよい。
<<Aspect 5-2>>
Switching UL beam management on and off for a UL reception point may be triggered by the UE.

<<<オプション1>>>
 UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えがトリガされる条件として、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション1-1:UEは、RS(例えば、SSB(SS/PBCH))の受信結果(例えばRSRP)に基づいて、切り替えを実施してもよい。UEは、例えば、DL送信ポイントからのSSB/CSI-RSのRSRPが閾値以下である場合、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオンにしてもよい。UEは、例えば、UL受信ポイントからのSSB/CSI-RSのRSRPが閾値以下である場合、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオフにしてもよい。
オプション1-2:UEは、別のDL信号/チャネル(例えば、TRS/CSI-RS)の受信結果(例えばRSRP)に基づいて、切り替えを実施してもよい。
<<<Option 1>>>
At least one of the following options may be applied as a condition for triggering the on/off switching of UL beam management for a UL reception point:
Option 1-1: The UE may perform switching based on the reception result (e.g., RSRP) of the RS (e.g., SSB (SS/PBCH)). For example, the UE may turn on UL beam management for the UL reception point if the RSRP of the SSB/CSI-RS from the DL transmission point is below a threshold. For example, the UE may turn off UL beam management for the UL reception point if the RSRP of the SSB/CSI-RS from the UL reception point is below a threshold.
Option 1-2: The UE may perform switching based on the reception results (e.g., RSRP) of another DL signal/channel (e.g., TRS/CSI-RS).

<<<オプション2>>>
 UEがULビーム管理の起動(オン)について、UL受信ポイントに報告するかどうかについて、以下のオプションの少なくとも1つが適用されてもよい。
オプション2-1:UEがULビーム管理の起動/開始を報告しない。
オプション2-2:UEがULビーム管理の起動/開始を報告する。この報告は、PUSCH送信、PUCCH送信、SRS送信の少なくとも1つによって実行されてもよい。
オプション2-3:UEがULビーム管理の起動/開始をNWに要求してもよい。要求は、SRS設定の要求を含んでもよい。
<<<Option 2>>>
Regarding whether the UE reports to the UL reception point about the activation (on) of UL beam management, at least one of the following options may apply:
Option 2-1: The UE does not report activation/initiation of UL beam management.
Option 2-2: The UE reports the activation/start of UL beam management. This reporting may be performed by at least one of PUSCH transmission, PUCCH transmission, and SRS transmission.
Option 2-3: The UE may request the NW to activate/start UL beam management. The request may include a request for SRS configuration.

 ULビーム管理の停止(オフ)について、上記オプション2-1~2-3と同様の方法が適用されてもよい。 To disable (turn off) UL beam management, methods similar to those described in options 2-1 to 2-3 above may be applied.

 本開示における、CB/NCB SRS送信のレガシー動作(例えば、レガシーCB、レガシーNCB、レガシーULビーム管理)を適用することは、SRSリソースセットの数/SRSリソース数が、以下の少なくとも1つであることを意味してもよい。
・SRSリソースセットの数は、最大1(Rel.15)または最大2(Rel.16以降)。SRSリソースセットの数は、UEパネル数に対応していてもよい。
・SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソースの数はCB SRSの場合、最大2(Rel.15)または最大4(Rel.16以降、フルパワーMIMOモード2をサポートするUEに対応)。
・SRSリソースセット毎のSRSリソースの数はNCB SRSの場合、最大4(Rel.15)または最大8(Rel.18以降、8送信(アンテナポート)をサポートするUEに対応)。
In the present disclosure, applying legacy operations of CB/NCB SRS transmission (e.g., legacy CB, legacy NCB, legacy UL beam management) may mean that the number of SRS resource sets/number of SRS resources is at least one of the following:
The number of SRS resource sets is up to 1 (Rel. 15) or up to 2 (Rel. 16 and later). The number of SRS resource sets may correspond to the number of UE panels.
The number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is up to 2 (Rel. 15) or up to 4 (Rel. 16 and later, for UEs supporting full power MIMO mode 2) for CB SRS.
The number of SRS resources per SRS resource set is up to 4 (Rel. 15) or up to 8 (Rel. 18 and later, for UEs supporting 8 transmissions (antenna ports)) for NCB SRS.

 本実施形態によれば、UEの移動や通信環境等の変化に応じて、UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを容易に実施することができる。これにより、通信スループットの低下を抑制することができる。 According to this embodiment, UL beam management for UL reception points can be easily switched on and off in response to changes in UE movement, the communication environment, etc. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in communication throughput.

<補足>
<<UEへの情報の通知>>
 上述の実施形態における[ネットワーク(Network(NW))(例えば、基地局(Base Station(BS)))から]UEへの任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSからの任意の情報の受信)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、DCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PDCCH、PDSCH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<Additional Information>
<<Notification of information to UE>>
In the above-described embodiments, any information may be notified to the UE [from a network (NW) (e.g., a base station (BS)] (in other words, the UE receives any information from the BS) using physical layer signaling (e.g., DCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), a specific signal/channel (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH, reference signal), or a combination thereof.

 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たな論理チャネルID(Logical Channel ID(LCID))がMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the above notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new Logical Channel ID (LCID) in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.

 上記通知がDCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、当該DCIの特定のフィールド、当該DCIに付与される巡回冗長検査(Cyclic Redundancy Check(CRC))ビットのスクランブルに用いられる無線ネットワーク一時識別子(Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI))、当該DCIのフォーマットなどによって行われてもよい。 If the notification is made by DCI, the notification may be made by a specific field of the DCI, a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) used to scramble the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) bits assigned to the DCI, the format of the DCI, etc.

 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEへの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of any information to the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.

<<UEからの情報の通知>>
 上述の実施形態におけるUEから[NWへ]の任意の情報の通知(言い換えると、UEにおけるBSへの任意の情報の送信/報告)は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、UCI)、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、RRCシグナリング、MAC CE)、特定の信号/チャネル(例えば、PUCCH、PUSCH、PRACH、参照信号)、又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて行われてもよい。
<<Notification of information from UE>>
In the above-described embodiments, notification of any information from the UE [to the NW] (in other words, transmission/reporting of any information from the UE to the BS) may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., UCI), higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling, MAC CE), specific signals/channels (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH, reference signals), or a combination thereof.

 上記通知がMAC CEによって行われる場合、当該MAC CEは、既存の規格では規定されていない新たなLCIDがMACサブヘッダに含まれることによって識別されてもよい。 If the above notification is made by a MAC CE, the MAC CE may be identified by including a new LCID in the MAC subheader that is not specified in existing standards.

 上記通知がUCIによって行われる場合、上記通知は、PUCCH又はPUSCHを用いて送信されてもよい。 If the notification is made by UCI, the notification may be transmitted using PUCCH or PUSCH.

 また、上述の実施形態におけるUEからの任意の情報の通知は、周期的、セミパーシステント又は非周期的に行われてもよい。 Furthermore, any information notification from the UE in the above-described embodiments may be performed periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically.

<<各実施形態の適用について>>
 UE/BSにおいて、上述の実施形態の少なくとも1つについての特定の(1つ又は複数の)処理/動作/制御/想定/情報は、以下のいずれか又はこれらの複数の条件を満たす場合に適用されてもよい(用いられてもよい):
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報を示す上位レイヤパラメータが設定される、
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報が、関連する上位レイヤパラメータに基づいて決定される、
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報が、MAC CE/DCI/UCI/リソース/チャネル/RSによって、指定/アクティベート/トリガされる、
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報を示す(又は、に関連する)特定のUE能力(UE capability)を、報告する又はサポートする、
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報の適用が、特定の条件に基づいて判断される。
<<Application of each embodiment>>
In a UE/BS, the specific process/operation/control/assumption/information(s) of at least one of the above-described embodiments may be applied (used) when one or more of the following conditions are met:
- Upper layer parameters indicating the specific processing/operation/control/assumption/information are set;
The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on relevant higher layer parameters;
The specific process/action/control/assumption/information is specified/activated/triggered by MAC CE/DCI/UCI/resource/channel/RS,
Reporting or supporting specific UE capabilities indicating (or relating to) the specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information;
The application of the specific process/action/control/assumption/information is determined based on specific conditions.

 上記特定のUE能力は、以下の少なくとも1つを示してもよい:
 ・上記特定の処理/動作/制御/想定/情報をサポートすること、
 ・SRSの特定の用途(UL送受信ポイントに対するビーム管理用の用途)をサポートすること、
 ・シナリオ1(UL高密度配置)をサポートすること、
 ・シナリオ2(HetNet)をサポートすること、
 ・UL受信ポイントへのUL送信(SRS/PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH)をサポートすること、
 ・サポートするUL受信ポイント/DL送信ポイントの数。
The specific UE capabilities may indicate at least one of the following:
- Supporting the above specific processes/actions/controls/assumptions/information;
Supporting specific uses of SRS (for beam management for UL transmitting/receiving points);
Supporting scenario 1 (UL dense deployment),
Supporting Scenario 2 (HetNet),
Supporting UL transmissions (SRS/PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH) to UL reception points;
Number of supported UL reception points/DL transmission points.

 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全周波数にわたって(周波数に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、周波数(例えば、セル、バンド、バンドコンビネーション、BWP、コンポーネントキャリアなどの1つ又はこれらの組み合わせ)ごとの能力であってもよいし、周波数レンジ(例えば、Frequency Range 1(FR1)、FR2、FR3、FR4、FR5、FR2-1、FR2-2)ごとの能力であってもよいし、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))ごとの能力であってもよいし、Feature Set(FS)又はFeature Set Per Component-carrier(FSPC)ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that are applied across all frequencies (commonly regardless of frequency), capabilities for each frequency (e.g., one or a combination of cell, band, band combination, BWP, component carrier, etc.), capabilities for each frequency range (e.g., Frequency Range 1 (FR1), FR2, FR3, FR4, FR5, FR2-1, FR2-2), capabilities for each subcarrier spacing (SubCarrier Spacing (SCS)), or capabilities for each Feature Set (FS) or Feature Set Per Component-carrier (FSPC)).

 また、上記特定のUE能力は、全複信方式にわたって(複信方式に関わらず共通に)適用される能力であってもよいし、複信方式(例えば、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))、周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD)))ごとの能力であってもよい。 Furthermore, the above-mentioned specific UE capabilities may be capabilities that apply across all duplexing methods (commonly regardless of the duplexing method), or may be capabilities for each duplexing method (e.g., Time Division Duplex (TDD) or Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)).

 UE/BSは、上記条件が満たされない場合、既存の3GPPリリースにおいて規定される動作に従ってもよい。 If the above conditions are not met, the UE/BS may follow the behavior specified in existing 3GPP releases.

(付記)
 本開示の第1~第3の実施形態に関して、以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSRSの設定情報を受信する受信部と、
 前記設定情報に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御する制御部と、
 を有する端末。
[付記2]
 前記特定の用途は、ビーム管理、コードブック、ノンコードブック、およびアンテナスイッチングとは異なる用途である
 付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記制御部は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにコードブックSRS送信を用いる
 付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記制御部は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにノンコードブックSRS送信を用いる
 付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are added to the first to third embodiments of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
A receiving unit that receives configuration information of an SRS that is configured with a specific purpose used for UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point;
a control unit that controls SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the setting information;
A terminal having:
[Appendix 2]
2. The terminal of claim 1, wherein the specific application is an application other than beam management, codebook, non-codebook, and antenna switching.
[Appendix 3]
The terminal according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control unit uses codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.
[Appendix 4]
The terminal according to any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the control unit uses non-codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.

(付記)
 本開示の第4/第5の実施形態に関して、さらに以下の発明を付記する。
[付記1]
 上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を受信する受信部と、
 指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定する制御部と、
 を有する端末。
[付記2]
 前記制御部は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームとして、マクロTRPに対するビームとは異なるビーム、特定の方向に向かうビーム、または、マクロTRPに対するビームとは逆方向へのビームを決定する
 付記1に記載の端末。
[付記3]
 前記受信部は、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを示す設定を受信し、
 前記制御部は、前記切り替えを示す設定に基づいて、前記ULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施する
 付記1又は付記2に記載の端末。
[付記4]
 前記制御部は、参照信号の受信結果に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施する
 付記1から付記3のいずれかに記載の端末。
(Additional Note)
The following inventions are further noted regarding the fourth and fifth embodiments of the present disclosure.
[Appendix 1]
A receiving unit that receives setting information of a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) having a specific purpose set for use in UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point;
a control unit that determines an UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction;
A terminal having:
[Appendix 2]
The terminal described in Appendix 1, wherein the control unit determines, as the UL beam for the UL receiving point, a beam different from the beam for the macro TRP, a beam heading in a specific direction, or a beam heading in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.
[Appendix 3]
The receiving unit receives a setting indicating switching on or off of UL beam management for the UL reception point;
The terminal described in Supplementary Note 1 or Supplementary Note 2, wherein the control unit switches the UL beam management on and off based on a setting indicating the switching.
[Appendix 4]
The terminal described in any one of Supplementary Note 1 to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the control unit switches on and off UL beam management for the UL reception point based on the reception result of the reference signal.

(無線通信システム)
 以下、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの構成について説明する。この無線通信システムでは、本開示の上記各実施形態に係る無線通信方法のいずれか又はこれらの組み合わせを用いて通信が行われる。
(wireless communication system)
The configuration of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described below. In this wireless communication system, communication is performed using any one of the wireless communication methods according to the above embodiments of the present disclosure or a combination thereof.

 図8は、一実施形態に係る無線通信システムの概略構成の一例を示す図である。無線通信システム1(単にシステム1と呼ばれてもよい)は、Third Generation Partnership Project(3GPP)によって仕様化されるLong Term Evolution(LTE)、5th generation mobile communication system New Radio(5G NR)などを用いて通信を実現するシステムであってもよい。 Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of the schematic configuration of a wireless communication system according to one embodiment. Wireless communication system 1 (which may simply be referred to as system 1) may be a system that achieves communication using Long Term Evolution (LTE) specified by the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), 5th generation mobile communication system New Radio (5G NR), or the like.

 また、無線通信システム1は、複数のRadio Access Technology(RAT)間のデュアルコネクティビティ(マルチRATデュアルコネクティビティ(Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity(MR-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。MR-DCは、LTE(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access(E-UTRA))とNRとのデュアルコネクティビティ(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity(EN-DC))、NRとLTEとのデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity(NE-DC))などを含んでもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also support dual connectivity between multiple Radio Access Technologies (RATs) (Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC)). MR-DC may include dual connectivity between LTE (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and NR (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC)), dual connectivity between NR and LTE (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity (NE-DC)), etc.

 EN-DCでは、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がマスタノード(Master Node(MN))であり、NRの基地局(gNB)がセカンダリノード(Secondary Node(SN))である。NE-DCでは、NRの基地局(gNB)がMNであり、LTE(E-UTRA)の基地局(eNB)がSNである。 In EN-DC, the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the master node (MN), and the NR base station (gNB) is the secondary node (SN). In NE-DC, the NR base station (gNB) is the MN, and the LTE (E-UTRA) base station (eNB) is the SN.

 無線通信システム1は、同一のRAT内の複数の基地局間のデュアルコネクティビティ(例えば、MN及びSNの双方がNRの基地局(gNB)であるデュアルコネクティビティ(NR-NR Dual Connectivity(NN-DC)))をサポートしてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may support dual connectivity between multiple base stations within the same RAT (for example, dual connectivity where both the MN and SN are NR base stations (gNBs) (NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NN-DC))).

 無線通信システム1は、比較的カバレッジの広いマクロセルC1を形成する基地局11と、マクロセルC1内に配置され、マクロセルC1よりも狭いスモールセルC2を形成する基地局12(12a-12c)と、を備えてもよい。ユーザ端末20は、少なくとも1つのセル内に位置してもよい。各セル及びユーザ端末20の配置、数、形状、大きさなどは、図に示す態様に限定されない。以下、基地局11及び12を区別しない場合は、基地局10と総称する。 The wireless communication system 1 may include a base station 11 that forms a macrocell C1 with relatively wide coverage, and base stations 12 (12a-12c) that are located within the macrocell C1 and form a small cell C2 that is smaller than the macrocell C1. A user terminal 20 may be located within at least one of the cells. The location, number, shape, size, etc. of each cell and user terminal 20 are not limited to the configuration shown in the figure. Hereinafter, when base stations 11 and 12 are not to be distinguished, they will be collectively referred to as base station 10.

 なお、無線通信システム1は、Multi Input Multi Output(MIMO)を利用してもよい。例えば、1つのセルは、1つのアンテナ/基地局10によって形成されてもよいし、複数のアンテナ/基地局10によって形成されてもよい。1つの[仮想的な]セル(例えば、スーパーセルと呼ばれてもよい)が、複数の[仮想的な]セル(例えば、サブセルと呼ばれてもよい)によって構成されてもよい。スーパーセルは、物理的な範囲が固定的なセルに該当してもよく、サブセルは、物理的な範囲が準静的/動的に変動するセルに該当してもよい。この場合、無線通信システム1は、セルフリーシステムと呼ばれてもよい。 The wireless communication system 1 may also utilize multi-input multi-output (MIMO). For example, one cell may be formed by one antenna/base station 10, or by multiple antennas/base stations 10. One [virtual] cell (which may be called, for example, a supercell) may be made up of multiple [virtual] cells (which may be called, for example, subcells). A supercell may correspond to a cell with a fixed physical range, and a subcell may correspond to a cell with a quasi-static/dynamically changing physical range. In this case, the wireless communication system 1 may be called a cell-free system.

 ユーザ端末20は、複数の基地局10のうち、少なくとも1つに接続してもよい。ユーザ端末20は、複数のコンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))を用いたキャリアアグリゲーション(Carrier Aggregation(CA))及びデュアルコネクティビティ(DC)の少なくとも一方を利用してもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be connected to at least one of the multiple base stations 10. The user terminal 20 may use at least one of carrier aggregation (CA) using multiple component carriers (CC) and dual connectivity (DC).

 各CCは、第1の周波数帯(Frequency Range 1(FR1))及び第2の周波数帯(Frequency Range 2(FR2))の少なくとも1つに含まれてもよい。マクロセルC1はFR1に含まれてもよいし、スモールセルC2はFR2に含まれてもよい。例えば、FR1は、6GHz以下の周波数帯(サブ6GHz(sub-6GHz))であってもよいし、FR2は、24GHzよりも高い周波数帯(above-24GHz)であってもよい。なお、FR1及びFR2の周波数帯、定義などはこれらに限られず、例えばFR1がFR2よりも高い周波数帯に該当してもよい。 Each CC may be included in at least one of a first frequency band (Frequency Range 1 (FR1)) and a second frequency band (Frequency Range 2 (FR2)). Macrocell C1 may be included in FR1, and small cell C2 may be included in FR2. For example, FR1 may be a frequency band below 6 GHz (sub-6 GHz), and FR2 may be a frequency band above 24 GHz (above-24 GHz). Note that the frequency bands and definitions of FR1 and FR2 are not limited to these, and for example, FR1 may correspond to a higher frequency band than FR2.

 また、ユーザ端末20は、各CCにおいて、時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))及び周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))の少なくとも1つを用いて通信を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, the user terminal 20 may communicate using at least one of time division duplex (TDD) and frequency division duplex (FDD) in each CC.

 複数の基地局10は、有線(例えば、Common Public Radio Interface(CPRI)に準拠した光ファイバ、X2/Xnインターフェースなど)又は無線(例えば、NR通信)によって接続されてもよい。例えば、基地局11及び12間においてNR通信がバックホールとして利用される場合、上位局に該当する基地局11はIntegrated Access Backhaul(IAB)ドナー、中継局(リレー)に該当する基地局12はIABノードと呼ばれてもよい。 Multiple base stations 10 may be connected by wire (e.g., optical fiber compliant with the Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI), X2/Xn interface, etc.) or wirelessly (e.g., NR communication). For example, if NR communication is used as a backhaul between base stations 11 and 12, base station 11, which corresponds to the upper station, may be called an Integrated Access Backhaul (IAB) donor, and base station 12, which corresponds to the relay station (relay), may be called an IAB node.

 基地局10は、他の基地局10を介して、又は直接コアネットワーク30に接続されてもよい。コアネットワーク30は、例えば、Evolved Packet Core(EPC)、5G Core Network(5GCN)、Next Generation Core(NGC)などの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 A base station 10 may be connected to the core network 30 directly or via another base station 10. The core network 30 may include, for example, at least one of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a 5G Core Network (5GCN), a Next Generation Core (NGC), etc.

 コアネットワーク30は、例えば、User Plane Function(UPF)、Access and Mobility management Function(AMF)、Session Management Function(SMF)、Unified Data Management(UDM)、Application Function(AF)、Data Network(DN)、Location Management Function(LMF)、保守運用管理(Operation、Administration and Maintenance(Management)(OAM))などのネットワーク機能(Network Functions(NF))を含んでもよい。なお、1つのネットワークノードによって複数の機能が提供されてもよい。また、DNを介して外部ネットワーク(例えば、インターネット)との通信が行われてもよい。 The core network 30 may include network functions (Network Functions (NF)) such as, for example, a User Plane Function (UPF), an Access and Mobility management Function (AMF), a Session Management Function (SMF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), a Data Network (DN), a Location Management Function (LMF), and Operation, Administration and Maintenance (Management) (OAM). Note that multiple functions may be provided by a single network node. Communication with an external network (e.g., the Internet) may also be performed via the DN.

 ユーザ端末20は、LTE、LTE-A、5Gなどの通信方式の少なくとも1つに対応した端末であってもよい。 The user terminal 20 may be a terminal that supports at least one of the communication methods such as LTE, LTE-A, and 5G.

 無線通信システム1においては、直交周波数分割多重(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM))ベースの無線アクセス方式が利用されてもよい。例えば、下りリンク(Downlink(DL))及び上りリンク(Uplink(UL))の少なくとも一方において、Cyclic Prefix OFDM(CP-OFDM)、Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM(DFT-s-OFDM)、Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access(OFDMA)、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)などが利用されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a wireless access method based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) may be used. For example, in at least one of the downlink (DL) and uplink (UL), Cyclic Prefix OFDM (CP-OFDM), Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM (DFT-s-OFDM), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA), etc. may be used.

 無線アクセス方式は、波形(waveform)と呼ばれてもよい。なお、無線通信システム1においては、UL及びDLの無線アクセス方式には、他の無線アクセス方式(例えば、他のシングルキャリア伝送方式、他のマルチキャリア伝送方式)が用いられてもよい。 The radio access method may also be called a waveform. Note that in the wireless communication system 1, other radio access methods (e.g., other single-carrier transmission methods, other multi-carrier transmission methods) may be used as the UL and DL radio access methods.

 無線通信システム1では、下りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される下り共有チャネル(Physical Downlink Shared Channel(PDSCH))、ブロードキャストチャネル(Physical Broadcast Channel(PBCH))、下り制御チャネル(Physical Downlink Control Channel(PDCCH))などが用いられてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, the downlink channel may be a downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, a broadcast channel (Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)), a downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)), or the like.

 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンクチャネルとして、各ユーザ端末20で共有される上り共有チャネル(Physical Uplink Shared Channel(PUSCH))、上り制御チャネル(Physical Uplink Control Channel(PUCCH))、ランダムアクセスチャネル(Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH))などが用いられてもよい。 Furthermore, in the wireless communication system 1, an uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)) shared by each user terminal 20, an uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)), a random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)), etc. may be used as an uplink channel.

 PDSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報、System Information Block(SIB)などが伝送される。PUSCHによって、ユーザデータ、上位レイヤ制御情報などが伝送されてもよい。また、PBCHによって、Master Information Block(MIB)が伝送されてもよい。 User data, upper layer control information, System Information Block (SIB), etc. are transmitted via PDSCH. User data, upper layer control information, etc. may also be transmitted via PUSCH. Furthermore, Master Information Block (MIB) may also be transmitted via PBCH.

 PDCCHによって、下位レイヤ制御情報が伝送されてもよい。下位レイヤ制御情報は、例えば、PDSCH及びPUSCHの少なくとも一方のスケジューリング情報を含む下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))を含んでもよい。 Lower layer control information may be transmitted via the PDCCH. The lower layer control information may include, for example, Downlink Control Information (DCI) including scheduling information for at least one of the PDSCH and PUSCH.

 なお、PDSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、DLアサインメント、DL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよいし、PUSCHをスケジューリングするDCIは、ULグラント、UL DCIなどと呼ばれてもよい。なお、PDSCHはDLデータで読み替えられてもよいし、PUSCHはULデータで読み替えられてもよい。 Note that the DCI that schedules the PDSCH may be referred to as a DL assignment or DL DCI, and the DCI that schedules the PUSCH may be referred to as a UL grant or UL DCI. Note that the PDSCH may be interpreted as DL data, and the PUSCH may be interpreted as UL data.

 PDCCHの検出には、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))及びサーチスペース(search space)が利用されてもよい。CORESETは、DCIをサーチするリソースに対応する。サーチスペースは、PDCCH候補(PDCCH candidates)のサーチ領域及びサーチ方法に対応する。1つのCORESETは、1つ又は複数のサーチスペースに関連付けられてもよい。UEは、サーチスペース設定に基づいて、あるサーチスペースに関連するCORESETをモニタしてもよい。 A control resource set (CORESET) and a search space may be used to detect the PDCCH. The CORESET corresponds to the resources to search for DCI. The search space corresponds to the search area and search method for PDCCH candidates. One CORESET may be associated with one or more search spaces. The UE may monitor the CORESET associated with a certain search space based on the search space configuration.

 1つのサーチスペースは、1つ又は複数のアグリゲーションレベル(aggregation Level)に該当するPDCCH候補に対応してもよい。1つ又は複数のサーチスペースは、サーチスペースセットと呼ばれてもよい。なお、本開示の「サーチスペース」、「サーチスペースセット」、「サーチスペース設定」、「サーチスペースセット設定」、「CORESET」、「CORESET設定」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 One search space may correspond to PDCCH candidates corresponding to one or more aggregation levels. One or more search spaces may be referred to as a search space set. Note that in this disclosure, "search space," "search space set," "search space setting," "search space set setting," "CORESET," "CORESET setting," etc. may be read interchangeably.

 PUCCHによって、チャネル状態情報(Channel State Information(CSI))、送達確認情報(例えば、Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement(HARQ-ACK)、ACK/NACKなどと呼ばれてもよい)及びスケジューリングリクエスト(Scheduling Request(SR))の少なくとも1つを含む上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI))が伝送されてもよい。PRACHによって、セルとの接続確立のためのランダムアクセスプリアンブルが伝送されてもよい。 The PUCCH may transmit uplink control information (UCI) including at least one of channel state information (CSI), delivery confirmation information (which may be called, for example, Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest ACKnowledgement (HARQ-ACK), ACK/NACK, etc.), and scheduling request (SR). The PRACH may transmit a random access preamble for establishing a connection with a cell.

 なお、本開示において下りリンク、上りリンクなどは「リンク」を付けずに表現されてもよい。また、各種チャネルの先頭に「物理(Physical)」を付けずに表現されてもよい。 Note that in this disclosure, downlink, uplink, etc. may be expressed without adding the word "link." Also, various channels may be expressed without adding "Physical" to the beginning.

 無線通信システム1では、同期信号(Synchronization Signal(SS))、下りリンク参照信号(Downlink Reference Signal(DL-RS))などが伝送されてもよい。無線通信システム1では、DL-RSとして、セル固有参照信号(Cell-specific Reference Signal(CRS))、チャネル状態情報参照信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal(CSI-RS))、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))、位置決定参照信号(Positioning Reference Signal(PRS))、位相トラッキング参照信号(Phase Tracking Reference Signal(PTRS))などが伝送されてもよい。 In the wireless communication system 1, a synchronization signal (SS), a downlink reference signal (DL-RS), etc. may be transmitted. In the wireless communication system 1, as the DL-RS, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), a positioning reference signal (PRS), a phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), etc. may be transmitted.

 同期信号は、例えば、プライマリ同期信号(Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS))及びセカンダリ同期信号(Secondary Synchronization Signal(SSS))の少なくとも1つであってもよい。SS(PSS、SSS)及びPBCH(及びPBCH用のDMRS)を含む信号ブロックは、SS/PBCHブロック、SS Block(SSB)などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、SS、SSBなども、参照信号と呼ばれてもよい。 The synchronization signal may be, for example, at least one of a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS). A signal block including an SS (PSS, SSS) and a PBCH (and a DMRS for the PBCH) may be referred to as an SS/PBCH block, an SS block (SSB), etc. Note that SS, SSB, etc. may also be referred to as a reference signal.

 また、無線通信システム1では、上りリンク参照信号(Uplink Reference Signal(UL-RS))として、測定用参照信号(Sounding Reference Signal(SRS))、復調用参照信号(DMRS)などが伝送されてもよい。なお、DMRSはユーザ端末固有参照信号(UE-specific Reference Signal)と呼ばれてもよい。 Furthermore, in the wireless communication system 1, a sounding reference signal (SRS), a demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. may be transmitted as an uplink reference signal (UL-RS). DMRS may also be called a user equipment-specific reference signal (UE-specific Reference Signal).

(基地局)
 図9は、一実施形態に係る基地局の構成の一例を示す図である。基地局10は、制御部110、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース(transmission line interface)140を備えている。なお、制御部110、送受信部120及び送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(base station)
9 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a base station according to an embodiment. The base station 10 includes a control unit 110, a transceiver unit 120, a transceiver antenna 130, and a transmission line interface 140. Note that the base station may include one or more of each of the control unit 110, the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission line interface 140.

 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、基地局10は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and it may be assumed that the base station 10 also has other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.

 制御部110は、基地局10全体の制御を実施する。制御部110は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 110 controls the entire base station 10. The control unit 110 can be composed of a controller, a control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.

 制御部110は、信号の生成、スケジューリング(例えば、リソース割り当て、マッピング)などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部110は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列(sequence)などを生成し、送受信部120に転送してもよい。制御部110は、通信チャネルの呼処理(設定、解放など)、基地局10の状態管理、無線リソースの管理などを行ってもよい。 The control unit 110 may control signal generation, scheduling (e.g., resource allocation, mapping), etc. The control unit 110 may also control transmission and reception using the transceiver unit 120, the transceiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140, measurements, etc. The control unit 110 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals, and transfer them to the transceiver unit 120. The control unit 110 may also perform call processing of communication channels (setting up, releasing, etc.), status management of the base station 10, management of radio resources, etc.

 送受信部120は、ベースバンド(baseband)部121、Radio Frequency(RF)部122、測定部123を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部121は、送信処理部1211及び受信処理部1212を含んでもよい。送受信部120は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ(phase shifter)、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 120 may include a baseband unit 121, a radio frequency (RF) unit 122, and a measurement unit 123. The baseband unit 121 may include a transmission processing unit 1211 and a reception processing unit 1212. The transceiver unit 120 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure relates.

 送受信部120は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部1211、RF部122から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部1212、RF部122、測定部123から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit. The transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 1211 and an RF unit 122. The receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 1212, an RF unit 122, and a measurement unit 123.

 送受信アンテナ130は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting and receiving antenna 130 can be composed of an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.

 送受信部120は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。送受信部120は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。 The transceiver 120 may transmit the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver 120 may also receive the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.

 送受信部120は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.

 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、例えば制御部110から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP)レイヤの処理、Radio Link Control(RLC)レイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、Medium Access Control(MAC)レイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer processing, Radio Link Control (RLC) layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), Medium Access Control (MAC) layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 110, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.

 送受信部120(送信処理部1211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、離散フーリエ変換(Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT))処理(必要に応じて)、逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform(IFFT))処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transmitter/receiver unit 120 (transmission processing unit 1211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) processing (if necessary), Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.

 送受信部120(RF部122)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ130を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 130.

 一方、送受信部120(RF部122)は、送受信アンテナ130によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 120 (RF unit 122) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 130.

 送受信部120(受信処理部1212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform(FFT))処理、逆離散フーリエ変換(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform(IDFT))処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 (reception processing unit 1212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processing, Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal, thereby acquiring user data, etc.

 送受信部120(測定部123)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部123は、受信した信号に基づいて、Radio Resource Management(RRM)測定、Channel State Information(CSI)測定などを行ってもよい。測定部123は、受信電力(例えば、Reference Signal Received Power(RSRP))、受信品質(例えば、Reference Signal Received Quality(RSRQ)、Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio(SINR)、Signal to Noise Ratio(SNR))、信号強度(例えば、Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI))、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部110に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver 120 (measurement unit 123) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 123 may perform Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurements, Channel State Information (CSI) measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 123 may measure received power (e.g., Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)), received quality (e.g., Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)), signal strength (e.g., Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 110.

 伝送路インターフェース140は、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)、他の基地局10などとの間で信号を送受信(バックホールシグナリング)し、ユーザ端末20のためのユーザデータ(ユーザプレーンデータ)、制御プレーンデータなどを取得、伝送などしてもよい。 The transmission path interface 140 may transmit and receive signals (backhaul signaling) between devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes providing NF), other base stations 10, etc., and may acquire and transmit user data (user plane data), control plane data, etc. for the user terminal 20.

 なお、本開示における基地局10の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部120、送受信アンテナ130及び伝送路インターフェース140の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 Note that the transmitter and receiver of the base station 10 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 120, the transmitter/receiver antenna 130, and the transmission path interface 140.

 なお、基地局10は、無線ユニット(Radio Unit(RU))、分散ユニット(Distributed Unit(DU))及び中央ユニット(Central Unit(CU))の3つの要素に分離されてもよい。例えば、RUは、RF処理(デジタルビームフォーミング、デジタル-アナログ変換、アナログビームフォーミングなど)及び物理レイヤの下位機能(プリコーディング、IFFT、FFTなど)を実現してもよい。DUは、物理レイヤの上位機能(符号化からリソースエレメントマッピングなど)、MACレイヤの機能及びRLCレイヤの機能を実現してもよい。CUは、PDCPレイヤ、Service Data Adaptation Protocol(SDAP)レイヤ及びRRCレイヤの機能を実現してもよい。 The base station 10 may be separated into three elements: a radio unit (RU), a distributed unit (DU), and a central unit (CU). For example, the RU may perform RF processing (digital beamforming, digital-to-analog conversion, analog beamforming, etc.) and lower-level physical layer functions (precoding, IFFT, FFT, etc.). The DU may perform higher-level physical layer functions (encoding to resource element mapping, etc.), MAC layer functions, and RLC layer functions. The CU may perform PDCP layer, Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) layer, and RRC layer functions.

 本開示において、基地局10は、RU、DU及びCUの機能を全て実現する1つの装置を含んでもよいし、RU、DU及びCUの機能のうち一部の機能をそれぞれが実現し、互いに接続される複数の装置を含んでもよい。本開示において、基地局10は、RU/DU/CUと互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, the base station 10 may include a single device that implements all of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU, or may include multiple devices that each implement some of the functions of the RU, DU, and CU and are connected to each other. In the present disclosure, the base station 10 may be interchangeably referred to as the RU/DU/CU.

 送受信部120は、上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 120 may also transmit configuration information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) with a specific purpose set for use in uplink (UL) beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point.

 制御部110は、前記設定情報に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信が制御されることを想定してもよい。基地局10がUL受信ポイントである場合、送受信部120は、そのSRSを受信してもよい。 The control unit 110 may assume that SRS transmission to the UL reception point is controlled based on the setting information. If the base station 10 is an UL reception point, the transceiver unit 120 may receive the SRS.

 制御部110は、指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームが決定されることを想定してもよい。基地局10がUL受信ポイントである場合、送受信部120は、そのULビームを用いたUL信号を受信してもよい。 The control unit 110 may assume that the UL beam for the UL reception point is determined based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction. If the base station 10 is the UL reception point, the transceiver unit 120 may receive an UL signal using that UL beam.

(ユーザ端末)
 図10は、一実施形態に係るユーザ端末の構成の一例を示す図である。ユーザ端末20は、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を備えている。なお、制御部210、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230は、それぞれ1つ以上が備えられてもよい。
(user terminal)
10 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a user terminal according to an embodiment. The user terminal 20 includes a control unit 210, a transceiver unit 220, and a transceiver antenna 230. Note that the user terminal 20 may include one or more of each of the control unit 210, the transceiver unit 220, and the transceiver antenna 230.

 なお、本例では、本実施の形態における特徴部分の機能ブロックを主に示しており、ユーザ端末20は、無線通信に必要な他の機能ブロックも有すると想定されてもよい。以下で説明する各部の処理の一部は、省略されてもよい。 Note that this example mainly shows the functional blocks that characterize the present embodiment, and the user terminal 20 may also have other functional blocks necessary for wireless communication. Some of the processing of each unit described below may be omitted.

 制御部210は、ユーザ端末20全体の制御を実施する。制御部210は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるコントローラ、制御回路などから構成することができる。 The control unit 210 controls the entire user terminal 20. The control unit 210 can be composed of a controller, control circuit, etc., as described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains.

 制御部210は、信号の生成、マッピングなどを制御してもよい。制御部210は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230を用いた送受信、測定などを制御してもよい。制御部210は、信号として送信するデータ、制御情報、系列などを生成し、送受信部220に転送してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control signal generation, mapping, etc. The control unit 210 may also control transmission and reception, measurement, etc. using the transmission and reception unit 220 and the transmission and reception antenna 230. The control unit 210 may generate data, control information, sequences, etc. to be transmitted as signals and transfer them to the transmission and reception unit 220.

 送受信部220は、ベースバンド部221、RF部222、測定部223を含んでもよい。ベースバンド部221は、送信処理部2211、受信処理部2212を含んでもよい。送受信部220は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるトランスミッター/レシーバー、RF回路、ベースバンド回路、フィルタ、位相シフタ、測定回路、送受信回路などから構成することができる。 The transceiver unit 220 may include a baseband unit 221, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223. The baseband unit 221 may include a transmission processing unit 2211 and a reception processing unit 2212. The transceiver unit 220 may be composed of a transmitter/receiver, an RF circuit, a baseband circuit, a filter, a phase shifter, a measurement circuit, a transceiver circuit, etc., which are described based on common understanding in the technical field related to this disclosure.

 送受信部220は、一体の送受信部として構成されてもよいし、送信部及び受信部から構成されてもよい。当該送信部は、送信処理部2211、RF部222から構成されてもよい。当該受信部は、受信処理部2212、RF部222、測定部223から構成されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may be configured as an integrated transceiver unit, or may be composed of a transmitter unit and a receiver unit. The transmitter unit may be composed of a transmission processing unit 2211 and an RF unit 222. The receiver unit may be composed of a reception processing unit 2212, an RF unit 222, and a measurement unit 223.

 送受信アンテナ230は、本開示に係る技術分野での共通認識に基づいて説明されるアンテナ、例えばアレイアンテナなどから構成することができる。 The transmitting and receiving antenna 230 can be configured as an antenna described based on common understanding in the technical field to which this disclosure pertains, such as an array antenna.

 送受信部220は、上述の下りリンクチャネル、同期信号、下りリンク参照信号などを受信してもよい。送受信部220は、上述の上りリンクチャネル、上りリンク参照信号などを送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive the above-mentioned downlink channel, synchronization signal, downlink reference signal, etc. The transceiver unit 220 may also transmit the above-mentioned uplink channel, uplink reference signal, etc.

 送受信部220は、デジタルビームフォーミング(例えば、プリコーディング)、アナログビームフォーミング(例えば、位相回転)などを用いて、送信ビーム及び受信ビームの少なくとも一方を形成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may form at least one of the transmit beam and the receive beam using digital beamforming (e.g., precoding), analog beamforming (e.g., phase rotation), etc.

 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、例えば制御部210から取得したデータ、制御情報などに対して、PDCPレイヤの処理、RLCレイヤの処理(例えば、RLC再送制御)、MACレイヤの処理(例えば、HARQ再送制御)などを行い、送信するビット列を生成してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform PDCP layer processing, RLC layer processing (e.g., RLC retransmission control), MAC layer processing (e.g., HARQ retransmission control), etc. on data, control information, etc. obtained from the control unit 210, and generate a bit string to be transmitted.

 送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、送信するビット列に対して、チャネル符号化(誤り訂正符号化を含んでもよい)、変調、マッピング、フィルタ処理、DFT処理(必要に応じて)、IFFT処理、プリコーディング、デジタル-アナログ変換などの送信処理を行い、ベースバンド信号を出力してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform transmission processing such as channel coding (which may include error correction coding), modulation, mapping, filtering, DFT processing (if necessary), IFFT processing, precoding, and digital-to-analog conversion on the bit string to be transmitted, and output a baseband signal.

 なお、DFT処理を適用するか否かは、トランスフォームプリコーディングの設定に基づいてもよい。送受信部220(送信処理部2211)は、あるチャネル(例えば、PUSCH)について、トランスフォームプリコーディングが有効(enabled)である場合、当該チャネルをDFT-s-OFDM波形を用いて送信するために上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行ってもよいし、そうでない場合、上記送信処理としてDFT処理を行わなくてもよい。 Whether or not to apply DFT processing may be based on the settings for transform precoding. If transform precoding is enabled for a certain channel (e.g., PUSCH), the transceiver unit 220 (transmission processing unit 2211) may perform DFT processing as the transmission processing to transmit the channel using a DFT-s-OFDM waveform; if not, it may not be necessary to perform DFT processing as the transmission processing.

 送受信部220(RF部222)は、ベースバンド信号に対して、無線周波数帯への変調、フィルタ処理、増幅などを行い、無線周波数帯の信号を、送受信アンテナ230を介して送信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform modulation, filtering, amplification, etc. on the baseband signal to a radio frequency band, and transmit the radio frequency band signal via the transceiver antenna 230.

 一方、送受信部220(RF部222)は、送受信アンテナ230によって受信された無線周波数帯の信号に対して、増幅、フィルタ処理、ベースバンド信号への復調などを行ってもよい。 On the other hand, the transceiver unit 220 (RF unit 222) may perform amplification, filtering, demodulation to a baseband signal, etc. on the radio frequency band signal received by the transceiver antenna 230.

 送受信部220(受信処理部2212)は、取得されたベースバンド信号に対して、アナログ-デジタル変換、FFT処理、IDFT処理(必要に応じて)、フィルタ処理、デマッピング、復調、復号(誤り訂正復号を含んでもよい)、MACレイヤ処理、RLCレイヤの処理及びPDCPレイヤの処理などの受信処理を適用し、ユーザデータなどを取得してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (reception processing unit 2212) may apply reception processing such as analog-to-digital conversion, FFT processing, IDFT processing (if necessary), filtering, demapping, demodulation, decoding (which may include error correction decoding), MAC layer processing, RLC layer processing, and PDCP layer processing to the acquired baseband signal to acquire user data, etc.

 送受信部220(測定部223)は、受信した信号に関する測定を実施してもよい。例えば、測定部223は、受信した信号に基づいて、RRM測定、CSI測定などを行ってもよい。測定部223は、受信電力(例えば、RSRP)、受信品質(例えば、RSRQ、SINR、SNR)、信号強度(例えば、RSSI)、伝搬路情報(例えば、CSI)などについて測定してもよい。測定結果は、制御部210に出力されてもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 (measurement unit 223) may perform measurements on the received signal. For example, the measurement unit 223 may perform RRM measurements, CSI measurements, etc. based on the received signal. The measurement unit 223 may measure received power (e.g., RSRP), received quality (e.g., RSRQ, SINR, SNR), signal strength (e.g., RSSI), propagation path information (e.g., CSI), etc. The measurement results may be output to the control unit 210.

 なお、測定部223は、チャネル測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のためのチャネル測定を導出してもよい。チャネル測定用リソースは、例えば、ノンゼロパワー(Non Zero Power(NZP))CSI-RSリソースであってもよい。また、測定部223は、干渉測定用リソースに基づいて、CSI算出のための干渉測定を導出してもよい。干渉測定用リソースは、干渉測定用のNZP CSI-RSリソース、CSI-干渉測定(Interference Measurement(IM))リソースなどの少なくとも1つであってもよい。なお、CSI-IMは、CSI-干渉管理(Interference Management(IM))と呼ばれてもよいし、ゼロパワー(Zero Power(ZP))CSI-RSと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、CSI-RS、NZP CSI-RS、ZP CSI-RS、CSI-IM、CSI-SSBなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 The measurement unit 223 may derive channel measurements for CSI calculation based on channel measurement resources. The channel measurement resources may be, for example, non-zero power (NZP) CSI-RS resources. The measurement unit 223 may also derive interference measurements for CSI calculation based on interference measurement resources. The interference measurement resources may be at least one of NZP CSI-RS resources for interference measurement, CSI-Interference Measurement (IM) resources, etc. CSI-IM may also be referred to as CSI-Interference Management (IM) or may be interchangeably read as Zero Power (ZP) CSI-RS. In this disclosure, CSI-RS, NZP CSI-RS, ZP CSI-RS, CSI-IM, CSI-SSB, etc. may be interchangeable.

 なお、本開示におけるユーザ端末20の送信部及び受信部は、送受信部220及び送受信アンテナ230の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。 Note that the transmitter and receiver of the user terminal 20 in this disclosure may be configured by at least one of the transmitter/receiver 220 and the transmitter/receiver antenna 230.

 送受信部220は、上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を受信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may also receive configuration information for a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) with a specific purpose set for use in uplink (UL) beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point.

 制御部210は、前記設定情報に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するSRS送信を制御してもよい。 The control unit 210 may control SRS transmission to the UL reception point based on the setting information.

 前記特定の用途は、ビーム管理、コードブック、ノンコードブック、およびアンテナスイッチングとは異なる用途であってもよい。 The specific application may be an application other than beam management, codebook, non-codebook, and antenna switching.

 制御部210は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにコードブックSRS送信を用いてもよい。 The control unit 210 may use codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.

 制御部210は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビーム管理のためにノンコードブックSRS送信を用いてもよい。 The control unit 210 may use non-codebook SRS transmission for UL beam management for the UL reception point.

 制御部210は、指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定してもよい。 The control unit 210 may determine the UL beam for the UL reception point based on specified rules or transmitted instructions.

 制御部210は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームとして、マクロTRPに対するビームとは異なるビーム、特定の方向に向かうビーム、または、マクロTRPに対するビームとは逆方向へのビームを決定してもよい。 The control unit 210 may determine, as the UL beam for the UL reception point, a beam different from the beam for the macro TRP, a beam directed in a specific direction, or a beam directed in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP.

 送受信部220は、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを示す設定を受信してもよい。 The transceiver unit 220 may receive a setting indicating whether UL beam management for the UL reception point is on or off.

 制御部210は、前記切り替えを示す設定に基づいて、前記ULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施してもよい。 The control unit 210 may switch the UL beam management on and off based on the setting indicating the switch.

 制御部210は、参照信号の受信結果に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施してもよい。 The control unit 210 may switch UL beam management for the UL reception point on and off based on the reception result of the reference signal.

(ハードウェア構成)
 なお、上記実施形態の説明に用いたブロック図は、機能単位のブロックを示している。これらの機能ブロック(構成部)は、ハードウェア及びソフトウェアの少なくとも一方の任意の組み合わせによって実現される。また、各機能ブロックの実現方法は特に限定されない。すなわち、各機能ブロックは、物理的又は論理的に結合した1つの装置を用いて実現されてもよいし、物理的又は論理的に分離した2つ以上の装置を直接的又は間接的に(例えば、有線、無線などを用いて)接続し、これら複数の装置を用いて実現されてもよい。機能ブロックは、上記1つの装置又は上記複数の装置にソフトウェアを組み合わせて実現されてもよい。
(Hardware configuration)
The block diagrams used to explain the above embodiments show functional blocks. These functional blocks (components) are realized by any combination of hardware and/or software. Furthermore, the method for realizing each functional block is not particularly limited. That is, each functional block may be realized using a single device that is physically or logically coupled, or may be realized using two or more physically or logically separated devices that are directly or indirectly connected (e.g., wired, wireless, etc.) and these multiple devices. The functional block may also be realized by combining software with the single device or multiple devices.

 ここで、機能には、判断、決定、判定、計算、算出、処理、導出、調査、探索、確認、受信、送信、出力、アクセス、解決、選択、選定、確立、比較、想定、期待、みなし、報知(broadcasting)、通知(notifying)、通信(communicating)、転送(forwarding)、構成(configuring)、再構成(reconfiguring)、割り当て(allocating、mapping)、割り振り(assigning)などがあるが、これらに限られない。例えば、送信を機能させる機能ブロック(構成部)は、送信部(transmitting unit)、送信機(transmitter)などと呼称されてもよい。いずれも、上述したとおり、実現方法は特に限定されない。 Here, functions include, but are not limited to, judgment, determination, judgment, calculation, computation, processing, derivation, investigation, search, confirmation, reception, transmission, output, access, resolution, selection, election, establishment, comparison, assumption, expectation, deeming, broadcasting, notifying, communicating, forwarding, configuring, reconfiguring, allocating, mapping, and assignment. For example, a functional block (component) that performs transmission functions may be called a transmitting unit, transmitter, etc. As mentioned above, there are no particular limitations on how these functions are implemented.

 例えば、本開示の一実施形態における基地局、ユーザ端末などは、本開示の無線通信方法の処理を行うコンピュータとして機能してもよい。図11は、一実施形態に係る基地局及びユーザ端末のハードウェア構成の一例を示す図である。上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、物理的には、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002、ストレージ1003、通信装置1004、入力装置1005、出力装置1006、バス1007などを含むコンピュータ装置として構成されてもよい。 For example, a base station, a user terminal, etc. in one embodiment of the present disclosure may function as a computer that performs processing of the wireless communication method of the present disclosure. Figure 11 is a diagram showing an example of the hardware configuration of a base station and a user terminal according to one embodiment. The above-mentioned base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be physically configured as a computer device including a processor 1001, memory 1002, storage 1003, a communication device 1004, an input device 1005, an output device 1006, a bus 1007, etc.

 なお、本開示において、装置、回路、デバイス、部(section)、ユニットなどの文言は、互いに読み替えることができる。基地局10及びユーザ端末20のハードウェア構成は、図に示した各装置を1つ又は複数含むように構成されてもよいし、一部の装置を含まずに構成されてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as apparatus, circuit, device, section, and unit may be used interchangeably. The hardware configuration of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include one or more of the devices shown in the figures, or may be configured to exclude some of the devices.

 例えば、プロセッサ1001は1つだけ図示されているが、複数のプロセッサがあってもよい。また、処理は、1のプロセッサによって実行されてもよいし、処理が同時に、逐次に、又はその他の手法を用いて、2以上のプロセッサによって実行されてもよい。なお、プロセッサ1001は、1以上のチップによって実装されてもよい。 For example, although only one processor 1001 is shown, there may be multiple processors. Furthermore, processing may be performed by a single processor, or processing may be performed by two or more processors simultaneously, sequentially, or using other techniques. Furthermore, the processor 1001 may be implemented by one or more chips.

 基地局10及びユーザ端末20における各機能は、例えば、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などのハードウェア上に所定のソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み込ませることによって、プロセッサ1001が演算を行い、通信装置1004を介する通信を制御したり、メモリ1002及びストレージ1003におけるデータの読み出し及び書き込みの少なくとも一方を制御したりすることによって実現される。 The functions of the base station 10 and the user terminal 20 are realized, for example, by loading specific software (programs) onto hardware such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, causing the processor 1001 to perform calculations, control communications via the communication device 1004, and control at least one of reading and writing data from and to the memory 1002 and storage 1003.

 プロセッサ1001は、例えば、オペレーティングシステムを動作させてコンピュータ全体を制御する。プロセッサ1001は、周辺装置とのインターフェース、制御装置、演算装置、レジスタなどを含む中央処理装置(Central Processing Unit(CPU))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の制御部110(210)、送受信部120(220)などの少なくとも一部は、プロセッサ1001によって実現されてもよい。 The processor 1001, for example, runs an operating system to control the entire computer. The processor 1001 may be configured as a central processing unit (CPU) that includes an interface with peripheral devices, a control unit, an arithmetic unit, registers, etc. For example, at least a portion of the above-mentioned control unit 110 (210), transceiver unit 120 (220), etc. may be realized by the processor 1001.

 また、プロセッサ1001は、プログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュール、データなどを、ストレージ1003及び通信装置1004の少なくとも一方からメモリ1002に読み出し、これらに従って各種の処理を実行する。プログラムとしては、上述の実施形態において説明した動作の少なくとも一部をコンピュータに実行させるプログラムが用いられる。例えば、制御部110(210)は、メモリ1002に格納され、プロセッサ1001において動作する制御プログラムによって実現されてもよく、他の機能ブロックについても同様に実現されてもよい。 In addition, the processor 1001 reads programs (program code), software modules, data, etc. from at least one of the storage 1003 and the communication device 1004 into the memory 1002, and executes various processes in accordance with these. The programs used are those that cause a computer to execute at least some of the operations described in the above-described embodiments. For example, the control unit 110 (210) may be implemented by a control program stored in the memory 1002 and running on the processor 1001, and similar implementations may be used for other functional blocks.

 メモリ1002は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、Read Only Memory(ROM)、Erasable Programmable ROM(EPROM)、Electrically EPROM(EEPROM)、Random Access Memory(RAM)、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。メモリ1002は、レジスタ、キャッシュ、メインメモリ(主記憶装置)などと呼ばれてもよい。メモリ1002は、本開示の一実施形態に係る無線通信方法を実施するために実行可能なプログラム(プログラムコード)、ソフトウェアモジュールなどを保存することができる。 Memory 1002 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of, for example, at least one of Read Only Memory (ROM), Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically EPROM (EEPROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), or other suitable storage medium. Memory 1002 may also be referred to as a register, cache, main memory, etc. Memory 1002 can store executable programs (program code), software modules, etc. for implementing a wireless communication method according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

 ストレージ1003は、コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であり、例えば、フレキシブルディスク、フロッピー(登録商標)ディスク、光磁気ディスク(例えば、コンパクトディスク(Compact Disc ROM(CD-ROM)など)、デジタル多用途ディスク、Blu-ray(登録商標)ディスク)、リムーバブルディスク、ハードディスクドライブ、スマートカード、フラッシュメモリデバイス(例えば、カード、スティック、キードライブ)、磁気ストライプ、データベース、サーバ、その他の適切な記憶媒体の少なくとも1つによって構成されてもよい。ストレージ1003は、補助記憶装置と呼ばれてもよい。 Storage 1003 is a computer-readable recording medium and may be composed of at least one of a flexible disk, a floppy disk, a magneto-optical disk (e.g., a compact disc (Compact Disc ROM (CD-ROM)), a digital versatile disc, a Blu-ray disc), a removable disk, a hard disk drive, a smart card, a flash memory device (e.g., a card, a stick, a key drive), a magnetic stripe, a database, a server, or other suitable storage medium. Storage 1003 may also be referred to as an auxiliary storage device.

 通信装置1004は、有線ネットワーク及び無線ネットワークの少なくとも一方を介してコンピュータ間の通信を行うためのハードウェア(送受信デバイス)であり、例えばネットワークデバイス、ネットワークコントローラ、ネットワークカード、通信モジュールなどともいう。通信装置1004は、例えば周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex(FDD))及び時分割複信(Time Division Duplex(TDD))の少なくとも一方を実現するために、高周波スイッチ、デュプレクサ、フィルタ、周波数シンセサイザなどを含んで構成されてもよい。例えば、上述の送受信部120(220)、送受信アンテナ130(230)などは、通信装置1004によって実現されてもよい。送受信部120(220)は、送信部120a(220a)と受信部120b(220b)とで、物理的に又は論理的に分離された実装がなされてもよい。 The communication device 1004 is hardware (transmitting/receiving device) for communicating between computers via at least one of a wired network and a wireless network, and is also referred to as a network device, network controller, network card, or communication module. The communication device 1004 may be configured to include high-frequency switches, duplexers, filters, frequency synthesizers, etc. to implement at least one of frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD). For example, the above-mentioned transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220), transmitter/receiver antenna 130 (230), etc. may be implemented by the communication device 1004. The transmitter/receiver unit 120 (220) may be implemented as a transmitter unit 120a (220a) and a receiver unit 120b (220b) that are physically or logically separated.

 入力装置1005は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサなど)である。出力装置1006は、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、Light Emitting Diode(LED)ランプなど)である。なお、入力装置1005及び出力装置1006は、一体となった構成(例えば、タッチパネル)であってもよい。 The input device 1005 is an input device (e.g., a keyboard, mouse, microphone, switch, button, sensor, etc.) that accepts input from the outside. The output device 1006 is an output device (e.g., a display, speaker, Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp, etc.) that outputs to the outside. Note that the input device 1005 and the output device 1006 may be integrated into one device (e.g., a touch panel).

 また、プロセッサ1001、メモリ1002などの各装置は、情報を通信するためのバス1007によって接続される。バス1007は、単一のバスを用いて構成されてもよいし、装置間ごとに異なるバスを用いて構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, each device, such as the processor 1001 and memory 1002, is connected by a bus 1007 for communicating information. The bus 1007 may be configured using a single bus, or may be configured using different buses between each device.

 また、基地局10及びユーザ端末20は、マイクロプロセッサ、デジタル信号プロセッサ(Digital Signal Processor(DSP))、Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC)、Programmable Logic Device(PLD)、Field Programmable Gate Array(FPGA)などのハードウェアを含んで構成されてもよく、当該ハードウェアを用いて各機能ブロックの一部又は全てが実現されてもよい。例えば、プロセッサ1001は、これらのハードウェアの少なくとも1つを用いて実装されてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station 10 and user terminal 20 may be configured to include hardware such as a microprocessor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a field programmable gate array (FPGA), and some or all of the functional blocks may be realized using this hardware. For example, the processor 1001 may be implemented using at least one of these pieces of hardware.

 なお、コアネットワーク30に含まれる装置(例えば、NFを提供するネットワークノード)も、上述の機能ブロック/ハードウェア構成によって実現されてもよい。 In addition, devices included in the core network 30 (e.g., network nodes that provide NF) may also be realized using the above-mentioned functional block/hardware configuration.

(変形例)
 なお、本開示において説明した用語及び本開示の理解に必要な用語については、同一の又は類似する意味を有する用語と置き換えてもよい。例えば、チャネル、シンボル及び信号(シグナル又はシグナリング)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、信号はメッセージであってもよい。参照信号(reference signal)は、RSと略称することもでき、適用される標準によってパイロット(Pilot)、パイロット信号などと呼ばれてもよい。また、コンポーネントキャリア(Component Carrier(CC))は、セル、周波数キャリア、キャリア周波数などと呼ばれてもよい。
(Modification)
Note that terms described in the present disclosure and terms necessary for understanding the present disclosure may be replaced with terms having the same or similar meanings. For example, a channel, a symbol, and a signal (signal or signaling) may be interchangeable. A signal may also be a message. A reference signal may be abbreviated as RS, and may also be called a pilot, pilot signal, etc. depending on the applicable standard. A component carrier (CC) may also be called a cell, frequency carrier, carrier frequency, etc.

 無線フレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数の期間(フレーム)によって構成されてもよい。無線フレームを構成する当該1つ又は複数の各期間(フレーム)は、サブフレームと呼ばれてもよい。さらに、サブフレームは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のスロットによって構成されてもよい。サブフレームは、ニューメロロジー(numerology)に依存しない固定の時間長(例えば、1ms)であってもよい。 A radio frame may be composed of one or more periods (frames) in the time domain. Each of the one or more periods (frames) constituting a radio frame may be called a subframe. Furthermore, a subframe may be composed of one or more slots in the time domain. A subframe may have a fixed time length (e.g., 1 ms) that is independent of numerology.

 ここで、ニューメロロジーは、ある信号又はチャネルの送信及び受信の少なくとも一方に適用される通信パラメータであってもよい。ニューメロロジーは、例えば、サブキャリア間隔(SubCarrier Spacing(SCS))、帯域幅、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス長、送信時間間隔(Transmission Time Interval(TTI))、TTIあたりのシンボル数、無線フレーム構成、送受信機が周波数領域において行う特定のフィルタリング処理、送受信機が時間領域において行う特定のウィンドウイング処理などの少なくとも1つを示してもよい。 Here, numerology may be a communication parameter applied to at least one of the transmission and reception of a signal or channel. Numerology may indicate, for example, at least one of the following: subcarrier spacing (SCS), bandwidth, symbol length, cyclic prefix length, transmission time interval (TTI), number of symbols per TTI, radio frame structure, specific filtering processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the frequency domain, and specific windowing processing performed by the transmitter/receiver in the time domain.

 スロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボル(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM)シンボル、Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)シンボルなど)によって構成されてもよい。また、スロットは、ニューメロロジーに基づく時間単位であってもよい。 A slot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain (such as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) symbols). A slot may also be a time unit based on numerology.

 スロットは、複数のミニスロットを含んでもよい。各ミニスロットは、時間領域において1つ又は複数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。また、ミニスロットは、サブスロットと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットは、スロットよりも少ない数のシンボルによって構成されてもよい。ミニスロットより大きい時間単位で送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプAと呼ばれてもよい。ミニスロットを用いて送信されるPDSCH(又はPUSCH)は、PDSCH(PUSCH)マッピングタイプBと呼ばれてもよい。 A slot may include multiple minislots. Each minislot may consist of one or more symbols in the time domain. A minislot may also be called a subslot. A minislot may consist of fewer symbols than a slot. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted in a time unit larger than a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type A. A PDSCH (or PUSCH) transmitted using a minislot may be called PDSCH (PUSCH) mapping type B.

 無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、いずれも信号を伝送する際の時間単位を表す。無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルは、それぞれに対応する別の呼称が用いられてもよい。なお、本開示におけるフレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット、シンボルなどの時間単位は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol all represent time units for transmitting signals. Radio frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol may each be referred to by a different name. Note that the time units used in this disclosure, such as frame, subframe, slot, minislot, and symbol, may be interchangeable.

 例えば、1サブフレームはTTIと呼ばれてもよいし、複数の連続したサブフレームがTTIと呼ばれてよいし、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれてもよい。つまり、サブフレーム及びTTIの少なくとも一方は、既存のLTEにおけるサブフレーム(1ms)であってもよいし、1msより短い期間(例えば、1-13シンボル)であってもよいし、1msより長い期間であってもよい。なお、TTIを表す単位は、サブフレームではなくスロット、ミニスロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 For example, one subframe may be referred to as a TTI, or multiple consecutive subframes may be referred to as a TTI, or one slot or one minislot may be referred to as a TTI. In other words, at least one of a subframe and a TTI may be a subframe (1 ms) as in existing LTE, or may be a period shorter than 1 ms (e.g., 1-13 symbols), or may be a period longer than 1 ms. Note that the unit representing a TTI may be called a slot, minislot, etc. instead of a subframe.

 ここで、TTIは、例えば、無線通信におけるスケジューリングの最小時間単位のことをいう。例えば、LTEシステムでは、基地局が各ユーザ端末に対して、無線リソース(各ユーザ端末において使用することが可能な周波数帯域幅、送信電力など)を、TTI単位で割り当てるスケジューリングを行う。なお、TTIの定義はこれに限られない。 Here, TTI refers to, for example, the smallest time unit for scheduling in wireless communication. For example, in an LTE system, a base station performs scheduling to allocate radio resources (such as the frequency bandwidth and transmission power that can be used by each user terminal) to each user terminal in TTI units. However, the definition of TTI is not limited to this.

 TTIは、チャネル符号化されたデータパケット(トランスポートブロック)、コードブロック、コードワードなどの送信時間単位であってもよいし、スケジューリング、リンクアダプテーションなどの処理単位となってもよい。なお、TTIが与えられたとき、実際にトランスポートブロック、コードブロック、コードワードなどがマッピングされる時間区間(例えば、シンボル数)は、当該TTIよりも短くてもよい。 The TTI may be a transmission time unit for a channel-encoded data packet (transport block), code block, code word, etc., or may be a processing unit for scheduling, link adaptation, etc. When a TTI is given, the time interval (e.g., number of symbols) to which a transport block, code block, code word, etc. is actually mapped may be shorter than the TTI.

 なお、1スロット又は1ミニスロットがTTIと呼ばれる場合、1以上のTTI(すなわち、1以上のスロット又は1以上のミニスロット)が、スケジューリングの最小時間単位となってもよい。また、当該スケジューリングの最小時間単位を構成するスロット数(ミニスロット数)は制御されてもよい。 Note that when one slot or one minislot is called a TTI, one or more TTIs (i.e., one or more slots or one or more minislots) may be the smallest time unit for scheduling. Furthermore, the number of slots (minislots) that make up the smallest time unit for scheduling may be controlled.

 1msの時間長を有するTTIは、通常TTI(3GPP Rel.8-12におけるTTI)、ノーマルTTI、ロングTTI、通常サブフレーム、ノーマルサブフレーム、ロングサブフレーム、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。通常TTIより短いTTIは、短縮TTI、ショートTTI、部分TTI(partial又はfractional TTI)、短縮サブフレーム、ショートサブフレーム、ミニスロット、サブスロット、スロットなどと呼ばれてもよい。 A TTI with a time length of 1 ms may be called a regular TTI (TTI in 3GPP Rel. 8-12), normal TTI, long TTI, regular subframe, normal subframe, long subframe, slot, etc. A TTI shorter than a regular TTI may be called a shortened TTI, short TTI, partial TTI (partial or fractional TTI), shortened subframe, short subframe, minislot, subslot, slot, etc.

 なお、ロングTTI(例えば、通常TTI、サブフレームなど)は、1msを超える時間長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよいし、ショートTTI(例えば、短縮TTIなど)は、ロングTTIのTTI長未満かつ1ms以上のTTI長を有するTTIで読み替えてもよい。 Note that a long TTI (e.g., a normal TTI, subframe, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a time length of more than 1 ms, and a short TTI (e.g., a shortened TTI, etc.) may be interpreted as a TTI having a TTI length of 1 ms or more but less than the TTI length of a long TTI.

 リソースブロック(Resource Block(RB))は、時間領域及び周波数領域のリソース割当単位であり、周波数領域において、1つ又は複数個の連続した副搬送波(サブキャリア(subcarrier))を含んでもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに関わらず同じであってもよく、例えば12であってもよい。RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数は、ニューメロロジーに基づいて決定されてもよい。 A resource block (RB) is a resource allocation unit in the time domain and frequency domain, and may include one or more consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may be the same regardless of numerology, and may be, for example, 12. The number of subcarriers included in an RB may also be determined based on numerology.

 また、RBは、時間領域において、1つ又は複数個のシンボルを含んでもよく、1スロット、1ミニスロット、1サブフレーム又は1TTIの長さであってもよい。1TTI、1サブフレームなどは、それぞれ1つ又は複数のリソースブロックによって構成されてもよい。 Furthermore, an RB may include one or more symbols in the time domain and may be one slot, one minislot, one subframe, or one TTI in length. One TTI, one subframe, etc. may each be composed of one or more resource blocks.

 なお、1つ又は複数のRBは、物理リソースブロック(Physical RB(PRB))、サブキャリアグループ(Sub-Carrier Group(SCG))、リソースエレメントグループ(Resource Element Group(REG))、PRBペア、RBペアなどと呼ばれてもよい。 Note that one or more RBs may also be referred to as a physical resource block (PRB), a sub-carrier group (SCG), a resource element group (REG), a PRB pair, an RB pair, etc.

 また、リソースブロックは、1つ又は複数のリソースエレメント(Resource Element(RE))によって構成されてもよい。例えば、1REは、1サブキャリア及び1シンボルの無線リソース領域であってもよい。 Furthermore, a resource block may be composed of one or more resource elements (REs). For example, one RE may be a radio resource region of one subcarrier and one symbol.

 帯域幅部分(Bandwidth Part(BWP))(部分帯域幅などと呼ばれてもよい)は、あるキャリアにおいて、あるニューメロロジー用の連続する共通RB(common resource blocks)のサブセットのことを表してもよい。ここで、共通RBは、当該キャリアの共通参照ポイントを基準としたRBのインデックスによって特定されてもよい。PRBは、あるBWPで定義され、当該BWP内で番号付けされてもよい。 A Bandwidth Part (BWP) (which may also be referred to as a partial bandwidth) may represent a subset of contiguous common resource blocks (RBs) for a given numerology on a given carrier. Here, the common RBs may be identified by the index of the RB relative to the common reference point of the carrier. PRBs may be defined in a BWP and numbered within that BWP.

 BWPには、UL BWP(UL用のBWP)と、DL BWP(DL用のBWP)とが含まれてもよい。UEに対して、1キャリア内に1つ又は複数のBWPが設定されてもよい。 BWPs may include UL BWPs (BWPs for UL) and DL BWPs (BWPs for DL). One or more BWPs may be configured for a UE within one carrier.

 設定されたBWPの少なくとも1つがアクティブであってもよく、UEは、アクティブなBWPの外で所定の信号/チャネルを送受信することを想定しなくてもよい。なお、本開示における「セル」、「キャリア」などは、「BWP」で読み替えられてもよい。 At least one of the configured BWPs may be active, and the UE may not expect to transmit or receive a given signal/channel outside the active BWP. Note that "cell," "carrier," etc. in this disclosure may be read as "BWP."

 なお、上述した無線フレーム、サブフレーム、スロット、ミニスロット及びシンボルなどの構造は例示に過ぎない。例えば、無線フレームに含まれるサブフレームの数、サブフレーム又は無線フレームあたりのスロットの数、スロット内に含まれるミニスロットの数、スロット又はミニスロットに含まれるシンボル及びRBの数、RBに含まれるサブキャリアの数、並びにTTI内のシンボル数、シンボル長、サイクリックプレフィックス(Cyclic Prefix(CP))長などの構成は、様々に変更することができる。 Note that the structures of the radio frames, subframes, slots, minislots, and symbols described above are merely examples. For example, the number of subframes included in a radio frame, the number of slots per subframe or radio frame, the number of minislots included in a slot, the number of symbols and RBs included in a slot or minislot, the number of subcarriers included in an RB, as well as the number of symbols in a TTI, symbol length, and cyclic prefix (CP) length can be changed in various ways.

 また、本開示において説明した情報、パラメータなどは、絶対値を用いて表されてもよいし、所定の値からの相対値を用いて表されてもよいし、対応する別の情報を用いて表されてもよい。例えば、無線リソースは、所定のインデックスによって指示されてもよい。 Furthermore, the information, parameters, etc. described in this disclosure may be expressed using absolute values, relative values from a predetermined value, or other corresponding information. For example, radio resources may be indicated by a predetermined index.

 本開示においてパラメータなどに使用する名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。さらに、これらのパラメータを使用する数式などは、本開示において明示的に開示したものと異なってもよい。様々なチャネル(PUCCH、PDCCHなど)及び情報要素は、あらゆる好適な名称によって識別できるので、これらの様々なチャネル及び情報要素に割り当てている様々な名称は、いかなる点においても限定的な名称ではない。 The names used for parameters and the like in this disclosure are not limiting in any way. Furthermore, the mathematical formulas and the like using these parameters may differ from those explicitly disclosed in this disclosure. The various channels (PUCCH, PDCCH, etc.) and information elements may be identified by any suitable names, and therefore the various names assigned to these various channels and information elements are not limiting in any way.

 本開示において説明した情報、信号などは、様々な異なる技術のいずれかを使用して表されてもよい。例えば、上記の説明全体に渡って言及され得るデータ、命令、コマンド、情報、信号、ビット、シンボル、チップなどは、電圧、電流、電磁波、磁界若しくは磁性粒子、光場若しくは光子、又はこれらの任意の組み合わせによって表されてもよい。 The information, signals, etc. described in this disclosure may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, chips, etc. that may be referred to throughout the above description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or magnetic particles, optical fields or photons, or any combination thereof.

 また、情報、信号などは、上位レイヤから下位レイヤ及び下位レイヤから上位レイヤの少なくとも一方へ出力され得る。情報、信号などは、複数のネットワークノードを介して入出力されてもよい。 Information, signals, etc. may be output from a higher layer to a lower layer and/or from a lower layer to a higher layer. Information, signals, etc. may be input/output via multiple network nodes.

 入出力された情報、信号などは、特定の場所(例えば、メモリ)に保存されてもよいし、管理テーブルを用いて管理してもよい。入出力される情報、信号などは、上書き、更新又は追記をされ得る。出力された情報、信号などは、削除されてもよい。入力された情報、信号などは、他の装置へ送信されてもよい。 Input and output information, signals, etc. may be stored in a specific location (for example, memory) or may be managed using a management table. Input and output information, signals, etc. may be overwritten, updated, or added to. Output information, signals, etc. may be deleted. Input information, signals, etc. may be sent to another device.

 本開示において記載される任意の情報(例えば、変数、定数、パラメータ)については、上述の実施形態において特に明記されていなくても、任意の第1の装置(例えば、UE/基地局)から任意の第2の装置(例えば、基地局/UE)に対して、当該任意の情報[の値]を示す/特定する(又は当該任意の情報に関連する)情報が、通知されてもよい。 With regard to any information (e.g., variables, constants, parameters) described in this disclosure, even if not specifically stated in the above embodiments, any first device (e.g., UE/base station) may notify any second device (e.g., base station/UE) of information indicating/identifying (or relating to) the value of that information.

 情報の通知は、本開示において説明した態様/実施形態に限られず、他の方法を用いて行われてもよい。例えば、本開示における情報の通知は、物理レイヤシグナリング(例えば、下り制御情報(Downlink Control Information(DCI))、上り制御情報(Uplink Control Information(UCI)))、上位レイヤシグナリング(例えば、Radio Resource Control(RRC)シグナリング、ブロードキャスト情報(マスタ情報ブロック(Master Information Block(MIB))、システム情報ブロック(System Information Block(SIB))など)、Medium Access Control(MAC)シグナリング)、その他の信号又はこれらの組み合わせによって実施されてもよい。 The notification of information is not limited to the aspects/embodiments described in this disclosure, and may be performed using other methods. For example, the notification of information in this disclosure may be performed using physical layer signaling (e.g., Downlink Control Information (DCI), Uplink Control Information (UCI))), higher layer signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling, broadcast information (Master Information Block (MIB), System Information Block (SIB)), etc.), Medium Access Control (MAC) signaling), other signals, or a combination of these.

 なお、物理レイヤシグナリングは、Layer 1/Layer 2(L1/L2)制御情報(L1/L2制御信号)、L1制御情報(L1制御信号)などと呼ばれてもよい。また、RRCシグナリングは、RRCメッセージと呼ばれてもよく、例えば、RRC接続セットアップ(RRC Connection Setup)メッセージ、RRC接続再構成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)メッセージなどであってもよい。また、MACシグナリングは、例えば、MAC制御要素(MAC Control Element(CE))を用いて通知されてもよい。 Note that physical layer signaling may also be referred to as Layer 1/Layer 2 (L1/L2) control information (L1/L2 control signal), L1 control information (L1 control signal), etc. Furthermore, RRC signaling may also be referred to as RRC messages, such as RRC Connection Setup messages or RRC Connection Reconfiguration messages. Furthermore, MAC signaling may also be notified using, for example, MAC Control Elements (CEs).

 また、所定の情報の通知(例えば、「Xであること」の通知)は、明示的な通知に限られず、暗示的に(例えば、当該所定の情報の通知を行わないことによって又は別の情報の通知によって)行われてもよい。 Furthermore, notification of specified information (e.g., notification that "X is true") is not limited to explicit notification, but may also be done implicitly (e.g., by not notifying the specified information or by notifying other information).

 判定は、1ビットで表される値(0か1か)によって行われてもよいし、真(true)又は偽(false)で表される真偽値(boolean)によって行われてもよいし、数値の比較(例えば、所定の値との比較)によって行われてもよい。 The determination may be made based on a value represented by a single bit (0 or 1), a Boolean value represented as true or false, or a comparison of numerical values (for example, a comparison with a predetermined value).

 ソフトウェアは、ソフトウェア、ファームウェア、ミドルウェア、マイクロコード、ハードウェア記述言語と呼ばれるか、他の名称で呼ばれるかを問わず、命令、命令セット、コード、コードセグメント、プログラムコード、プログラム、サブプログラム、ソフトウェアモジュール、アプリケーション、ソフトウェアアプリケーション、ソフトウェアパッケージ、ルーチン、サブルーチン、オブジェクト、実行可能ファイル、実行スレッド、手順、機能などを意味するよう広く解釈されるべきである。 Software shall be construed broadly to mean instructions, instruction sets, code, code segments, program code, programs, subprograms, software modules, applications, software applications, software packages, routines, subroutines, objects, executable files, threads of execution, procedures, functions, etc., whether referred to as software, firmware, middleware, microcode, hardware description language, or otherwise.

 また、ソフトウェア、命令、情報などは、伝送媒体を介して送受信されてもよい。例えば、ソフトウェアが、有線技術(同軸ケーブル、光ファイバケーブル、ツイストペア、デジタル加入者回線(Digital Subscriber Line(DSL))など)及び無線技術(赤外線、マイクロ波など)の少なくとも一方を使用してウェブサイト、サーバ、又は他のリモートソースから送信される場合、これらの有線技術及び無線技術の少なくとも一方は、伝送媒体の定義内に含まれる。 In addition, software, instructions, information, etc. may be transmitted and received via a transmission medium. For example, if software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using wired technology (such as coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, or Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)) and/or wireless technology (such as infrared or microwave), then the wired and/or wireless technology is included within the definition of transmission medium.

 本開示において使用する「システム」及び「ネットワーク」という用語は、互換的に使用され得る。「ネットワーク」は、ネットワークに含まれる装置(例えば、基地局)のことを意味してもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "system" and "network" may be used interchangeably. "Network" may refer to devices included in the network (e.g., base stations).

 本開示において、「プリコーディング」、「プリコーダ」、「ウェイト(プリコーディングウェイト)」、「擬似コロケーション(Quasi-Co-Location(QCL))」、「Transmission Configuration Indication state(TCI状態)」、「空間関係(spatial relation)」、「空間ドメインフィルタ(spatial domain filter)」、「送信電力」、「位相回転」、「アンテナポート」、「レイヤ」、「レイヤ数」、「ランク」、「リソース」、「リソースセット」、「ビーム」、「ビーム幅」、「ビーム角度」、「アンテナ」、「アンテナ素子」、「パネル」、「UEパネル」、「送信エンティティ」、「受信エンティティ」、などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "precoding," "precoder," "weight (precoding weight)," "Quasi-Co-Location (QCL)," "Transmission Configuration Indication state (TCI state)," "spatial relation," "spatial domain filter," "transmit power," "phase rotation," "antenna port," "layer," "number of layers," "rank," "resource," "resource set," "beam," "beam width," "beam angle," "antenna," "antenna element," "panel," "UE panel," "transmitting entity," "receiving entity," etc. may be used interchangeably.

 なお、本開示において、アンテナポートは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのアンテナポート(例えば、復調用参照信号(DeModulation Reference Signal(DMRS))ポート)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、リソースは、任意の信号/チャネルのためのリソース(例えば、参照信号リソース、SRSリソースなど)と互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、リソースは、時間/周波数/符号/空間/電力リソースを含んでもよい。また、空間ドメイン送信フィルタは、空間ドメイン送信フィルタ(spatial domain transmission filter)及び空間ドメイン受信フィルタ(spatial domain reception filter)の少なくとも一方を含んでもよい。 In the present disclosure, the term "antenna port" may be interchangeably read as an antenna port for any signal/channel (e.g., a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) port). In the present disclosure, the term "resource" may be interchangeably read as a resource for any signal/channel (e.g., a reference signal resource, an SRS resource, etc.). The resource may include time/frequency/code/space/power resources. The spatial domain transmit filter may include at least one of a spatial domain transmission filter and a spatial domain reception filter.

 上記グループは、例えば、空間関係グループ、符号分割多重(Code Division Multiplexing(CDM))グループ、参照信号(Reference Signal(RS))グループ、制御リソースセット(COntrol REsource SET(CORESET))グループ、PUCCHグループ、アンテナポートグループ(例えば、DMRSポートグループ)、レイヤグループ、リソースグループ、ビームグループ、アンテナグループ、パネルグループなどの少なくとも1つを含んでもよい。 The above groups may include, for example, at least one of a spatial relationship group, a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group, a Reference Signal (RS) group, a Control Resource Set (CORESET) group, a PUCCH group, an antenna port group (e.g., a DMRS port group), a layer group, a resource group, a beam group, an antenna group, a panel group, etc.

 また、本開示において、ビーム、SRSリソースインディケーター(SRS Resource Indicator(SRI))、CORESET、CORESETプール、PDSCH、PUSCH、コードワード(Codeword(CW))、トランスポートブロック(Transport Block(TB))、RSなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, beam, SRS Resource Indicator (SRI), CORESET, CORESET pool, PDSCH, PUSCH, codeword (CW), transport block (TB), RS, etc. may be read as interchangeable terms.

 また、本開示において、TCI状態、下りリンクTCI状態(DL TCI状態)、上りリンクTCI状態(UL TCI状態)、統一されたTCI状態(unified TCI state)、共通TCI状態(common TCI state)、ジョイントTCI状態などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms such as TCI state, downlink TCI state (DL TCI state), uplink TCI state (UL TCI state), unified TCI state, common TCI state, and joint TCI state may be interpreted interchangeably.

 また、本開示において、「QCL」、「QCL想定」、「QCL関係」、「QCLタイプ情報」、「QCL特性(QCL property/properties)」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)特性」、「特定のQCLタイプ(例えば、タイプA、タイプD)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms such as "QCL," "QCL assumptions," "QCL relationships," "QCL type information," "QCL properties," "specific QCL type (e.g., Type A, Type D) properties," and "specific QCL types (e.g., Type A, Type D)" may be read interchangeably.

 本開示において、インデックス、識別子(Identifier(ID))、インディケーター(indicator)、インディケーション(indication)、リソースIDなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。本開示において、シーケンス、リスト、セット、グループ、群、クラスター、サブセットなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, terms such as index, identifier (ID), indicator, indication, and resource ID may be interchangeable. In this disclosure, terms such as sequence, list, set, group, cluster, and subset may be interchangeable.

 また、空間関係情報Identifier(ID)(TCI状態ID)と空間関係情報(TCI状態)は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。「空間関係情報(TCI状態)」は、「空間関係情報(TCI状態)のセット」、「1つ又は複数の空間関係情報」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。TCI状態及びTCIは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。空間関係情報及び空間関係は、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the spatial relationship information identifier (ID) (TCI state ID) and spatial relationship information (TCI state) may be interchangeable. "Spatial relationship information (TCI state)" may be interchangeable as "set of spatial relationship information (TCI state)", "one or more pieces of spatial relationship information", etc. TCI state and TCI may be interchangeable. Spatial relationship information and spatial relationship may be interchangeable.

 本開示においては、「基地局(Base Station(BS))」、「無線基地局」、「固定局(fixed station)」、「NodeB」、「eNB(eNodeB)」、「gNB(gNodeB)」、「アクセスポイント(access point)」、「送信ポイント(Transmission Point(TP))」、「受信ポイント(Reception Point(RP))」、「送受信ポイント(Transmission/Reception Point(TRP))」、「パネル」、「セル」、「セクタ」、「セルグループ」、「キャリア」、「コンポーネントキャリア」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。基地局は、マクロセル、スモールセル、フェムトセル、ピコセルなどの用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Base Station (BS)," "Radio Base Station," "Fixed Station," "NodeB," "eNB (eNodeB)," "gNB (gNodeB)," "Access Point," "Transmission Point (TP)," "Reception Point (RP)," "Transmission/Reception Point (TRP)," "Panel," "Cell," "Sector," "Cell Group," "Carrier," and "Component Carrier" may be used interchangeably. Base stations may also be referred to by terms such as macrocell, small cell, femtocell, and picocell.

 基地局は、1つ又は複数(例えば、3つ)のセルを収容することができる。基地局が複数のセルを収容する場合、基地局のカバレッジエリア全体は複数のより小さいエリアに区分でき、各々のより小さいエリアは、基地局サブシステム(例えば、屋内用の小型基地局(Remote Radio Head(RRH)))によって通信サービスを提供することもできる。「セル」又は「セクタ」という用語は、このカバレッジにおいて通信サービスを行う基地局及び基地局サブシステムの少なくとも一方のカバレッジエリアの一部又は全体を指す。 A base station can accommodate one or more (e.g., three) cells. When a base station accommodates multiple cells, the entire coverage area of the base station can be divided into multiple smaller areas, and each smaller area can also be provided with communication services by a base station subsystem (e.g., a small indoor base station (Remote Radio Head (RRH))). The terms "cell" or "sector" refer to part or all of the coverage area of at least one of the base station and base station subsystems that provide communication services within this coverage area.

 本開示において、基地局が端末に情報を送信することは、当該基地局が当該端末に対して、当該情報に基づく制御/動作を指示することと、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, a base station transmitting information to a terminal may be interpreted as the base station instructing the terminal to control/operate based on that information.

 本開示においては、「移動局(Mobile Station(MS))」、「ユーザ端末(user terminal)」、「ユーザ装置(User Equipment(UE))」、「端末」などの用語は、互換的に使用され得る。 In this disclosure, terms such as "Mobile Station (MS)," "user terminal," "User Equipment (UE)," and "terminal" may be used interchangeably.

 移動局は、加入者局、モバイルユニット、加入者ユニット、ワイヤレスユニット、リモートユニット、モバイルデバイス、ワイヤレスデバイス、ワイヤレス通信デバイス、リモートデバイス、モバイル加入者局、アクセス端末、モバイル端末、ワイヤレス端末、リモート端末、ハンドセット、ユーザエージェント、モバイルクライアント、クライアント又はいくつかの他の適切な用語で呼ばれる場合もある。 A mobile station may also be referred to as a subscriber station, mobile unit, subscriber unit, wireless unit, remote unit, mobile device, wireless device, wireless communication device, remote device, mobile subscriber station, access terminal, mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client, or some other suitable terminology.

 基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、送信装置、受信装置、無線通信装置などと呼ばれてもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、移動体(moving object)に搭載されたデバイス、移動体自体などであってもよい。 At least one of the base station and the mobile station may be referred to as a transmitting device, a receiving device, a wireless communication device, etc. In addition, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be a device mounted on a moving object, the moving object itself, etc.

 当該移動体は、移動可能な物体をいい、移動速度は任意であり、移動体が停止している場合も当然含む。当該移動体は、例えば、車両、輸送車両、自動車、自動二輪車、自転車、コネクテッドカー、ショベルカー、ブルドーザー、ホイールローダー、ダンプトラック、フォークリフト、列車、バス、リヤカー、人力車、船舶(ship and other watercraft)、飛行機、ロケット、人工衛星、ドローン、マルチコプター、クアッドコプター、気球及びこれらに搭載される物を含み、またこれらに限られない。また、当該移動体は、運行指令に基づいて自律走行する移動体であってもよい。 The mobile body in question refers to an object that can move at any speed, and of course also includes cases where the mobile body is stationary. Examples of the mobile body in question include, but are not limited to, vehicles, transport vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, bicycles, connected cars, excavators, bulldozers, wheel loaders, dump trucks, forklifts, trains, buses, handcarts, rickshaws, ships and other watercraft, airplanes, rockets, satellites, drones, multicopters, quadcopters, balloons, and objects mounted on these. The mobile body in question may also be a mobile body that moves autonomously based on operation commands.

 当該移動体は、乗り物(例えば、車、飛行機など)であってもよいし、無人で動く移動体(例えば、ドローン、自動運転車など)であってもよいし、ロボット(有人型又は無人型)であってもよい。なお、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、必ずしも通信動作時に移動しない装置も含む。例えば、基地局及び移動局の少なくとも一方は、センサなどのInternet of Things(IoT)機器であってもよい。 The moving object may be a vehicle (e.g., a car, an airplane, etc.), an unmanned moving object (e.g., a drone, a self-driving car, etc.), or a robot (manned or unmanned). Note that at least one of the base station and the mobile station may also include devices that do not necessarily move during communication operations. For example, at least one of the base station and the mobile station may be an Internet of Things (IoT) device such as a sensor.

 図12は、一実施形態に係る車両の一例を示す図である。車両40は、駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49、各種センサ(電流センサ50、回転数センサ51、空気圧センサ52、車速センサ53、加速度センサ54、アクセルペダルセンサ55、ブレーキペダルセンサ56、シフトレバーセンサ57、及び物体検知センサ58を含む)、情報サービス部59と通信モジュール60を備える。 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a vehicle according to one embodiment. The vehicle 40 includes a drive unit 41, a steering unit 42, an accelerator pedal 43, a brake pedal 44, a shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, an axle 48, an electronic control unit 49, various sensors (including a current sensor 50, an RPM sensor 51, an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration sensor 54, an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a brake pedal sensor 56, a shift lever sensor 57, and an object detection sensor 58), an information service unit 59, and a communication module 60.

 駆動部41は、例えば、エンジン、モータ、エンジンとモータのハイブリッドの少なくとも1つで構成される。操舵部42は、少なくともステアリングホイール(ハンドルとも呼ぶ)を含み、ユーザによって操作されるステアリングホイールの操作に基づいて前輪46及び後輪47の少なくとも一方を操舵するように構成される。 The drive unit 41 is composed of, for example, at least one of an engine, a motor, or a hybrid of an engine and a motor. The steering unit 42 includes at least a steering wheel (also called a handle) and is configured to steer at least one of the front wheels 46 and the rear wheels 47 based on the operation of the steering wheel operated by the user.

 電子制御部49は、マイクロプロセッサ61、メモリ(ROM、RAM)62、通信ポート(例えば、入出力(Input/Output(IO))ポート)63で構成される。電子制御部49には、車両に備えられた各種センサ50-58からの信号が入力される。電子制御部49は、Electronic Control Unit(ECU)と呼ばれてもよい。 The electronic control unit 49 is composed of a microprocessor 61, memory (ROM, RAM) 62, and a communication port (e.g., an input/output (IO) port) 63. Signals are input to the electronic control unit 49 from various sensors 50-58 provided in the vehicle. The electronic control unit 49 may also be called an Electronic Control Unit (ECU).

 各種センサ50-58からの信号としては、モータの電流をセンシングする電流センサ50からの電流信号、回転数センサ51によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の回転数信号、空気圧センサ52によって取得された前輪46/後輪47の空気圧信号、車速センサ53によって取得された車速信号、加速度センサ54によって取得された加速度信号、アクセルペダルセンサ55によって取得されたアクセルペダル43の踏み込み量信号、ブレーキペダルセンサ56によって取得されたブレーキペダル44の踏み込み量信号、シフトレバーセンサ57によって取得されたシフトレバー45の操作信号、物体検知センサ58によって取得された障害物、車両、歩行者などを検出するための検出信号などがある。 Signals from the various sensors 50-58 include a current signal from a current sensor 50 that senses the motor current, a rotation speed signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by a rotation speed sensor 51, an air pressure signal for the front wheels 46/rear wheels 47 obtained by an air pressure sensor 52, a vehicle speed signal obtained by a vehicle speed sensor 53, an acceleration signal obtained by an acceleration sensor 54, a depression amount signal for the accelerator pedal 43 obtained by an accelerator pedal sensor 55, a depression amount signal for the brake pedal 44 obtained by a brake pedal sensor 56, an operation signal for the shift lever 45 obtained by a shift lever sensor 57, and a detection signal for detecting obstacles, vehicles, pedestrians, etc. obtained by an object detection sensor 58.

 情報サービス部59は、カーナビゲーションシステム、オーディオシステム、スピーカー、ディスプレイ、テレビ、ラジオ、といった、運転情報、交通情報、エンターテイメント情報などの各種情報を提供(出力)するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。情報サービス部59は、外部装置から通信モジュール60などを介して取得した情報を利用して、車両40の乗員に各種情報/サービス(例えば、マルチメディア情報/マルチメディアサービス)を提供する。 The information service unit 59 is composed of various devices, such as a car navigation system, audio system, speakers, displays, televisions, and radios, that provide (output) various information such as driving information, traffic information, and entertainment information, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices. The information service unit 59 uses information obtained from external devices via the communication module 60, etc., to provide various information/services (e.g., multimedia information/multimedia services) to the occupants of the vehicle 40.

 情報サービス部59は、外部からの入力を受け付ける入力デバイス(例えば、キーボード、マウス、マイクロフォン、スイッチ、ボタン、センサ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよいし、外部への出力を実施する出力デバイス(例えば、ディスプレイ、スピーカー、LEDランプ、タッチパネルなど)を含んでもよい。 The information service unit 59 may include input devices (e.g., keyboards, mice, microphones, switches, buttons, sensors, touch panels, etc.) that accept input from the outside, and may also include output devices (e.g., displays, speakers, LED lamps, touch panels, etc.) that output to the outside.

 運転支援システム部64は、ミリ波レーダ、Light Detection and Ranging(LiDAR)、カメラ、測位ロケータ(例えば、Global Navigation Satellite System(GNSS)など)、地図情報(例えば、高精細(High Definition(HD))マップ、自動運転車(Autonomous Vehicle(AV))マップなど)、ジャイロシステム(例えば、慣性計測装置(Inertial Measurement Unit(IMU))、慣性航法装置(Inertial Navigation System(INS))など)、人工知能(Artificial Intelligence(AI))チップ、AIプロセッサといった、事故を未然に防止したりドライバの運転負荷を軽減したりするための機能を提供するための各種機器と、これらの機器を制御する1つ以上のECUとから構成される。また、運転支援システム部64は、通信モジュール60を介して各種情報を送受信し、運転支援機能又は自動運転機能を実現する。 The driving assistance system unit 64 is composed of various devices that provide functions to prevent accidents and reduce the driver's driving burden, such as millimeter-wave radar, Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR), cameras, positioning locators (e.g., Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)), map information (e.g., High Definition (HD) maps, Autonomous Vehicle (AV) maps), gyro systems (e.g., Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and Inertial Navigation System (INS)), artificial intelligence (AI) chips, and AI processors, as well as one or more ECUs that control these devices. The driving assistance system unit 64 also transmits and receives various information via the communication module 60 to realize driving assistance or autonomous driving functions.

 通信モジュール60は、通信ポート63を介して、マイクロプロセッサ61及び車両40の構成要素と通信することができる。例えば、通信モジュール60は通信ポート63を介して、車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、電子制御部49内のマイクロプロセッサ61及びメモリ(ROM、RAM)62、各種センサ50-58との間でデータ(情報)を送受信する。 The communication module 60 can communicate with the microprocessor 61 and components of the vehicle 40 via the communication port 63. For example, the communication module 60 transmits and receives data (information) via the communication port 63 between the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, the microprocessor 61 and memory (ROM, RAM) 62 in the electronic control unit 49, and the various sensors 50-58, all of which are provided on the vehicle 40.

 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49のマイクロプロセッサ61によって制御可能であり、外部装置と通信を行うことが可能な通信デバイスである。例えば、外部装置との間で無線通信を介して各種情報の送受信を行う。通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49の内部と外部のどちらにあってもよい。外部装置は、例えば、上述の基地局10、ユーザ端末20などであってもよい。また、通信モジュール60は、例えば、上述の基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つであってもよい(基地局10及びユーザ端末20の少なくとも1つとして機能してもよい)。 The communication module 60 is a communication device that can be controlled by the microprocessor 61 of the electronic control unit 49 and can communicate with external devices. For example, it sends and receives various information to and from external devices via wireless communication. The communication module 60 may be located either inside or outside the electronic control unit 49. The external device may be, for example, the base station 10 or user terminal 20 described above. The communication module 60 may also be, for example, at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20 described above (or may function as at least one of the base station 10 and user terminal 20).

 通信モジュール60は、電子制御部49に入力された上述の各種センサ50-58からの信号、当該信号に基づいて得られる情報、及び情報サービス部59を介して得られる外部(ユーザ)からの入力に基づく情報、の少なくとも1つを、無線通信を介して外部装置へ送信してもよい。電子制御部49、各種センサ50-58、情報サービス部59などは、入力を受け付ける入力部と呼ばれてもよい。例えば、通信モジュール60によって送信されるPUSCHは、上記入力に基づく情報を含んでもよい。 The communications module 60 may transmit at least one of the following to an external device via wireless communication: signals from the various sensors 50-58 described above input to the electronic control unit 49; information obtained based on these signals; and information based on input from the outside (user) obtained via the information service unit 59. The electronic control unit 49, the various sensors 50-58, the information service unit 59, etc. may also be referred to as input units that accept input. For example, the PUSCH transmitted by the communications module 60 may include information based on the above input.

 通信モジュール60は、外部装置から送信されてきた種々の情報(交通情報、信号情報、車間情報など)を受信し、車両に備えられた情報サービス部59へ表示する。情報サービス部59は、情報を出力する(例えば、通信モジュール60によって受信されるPDSCH(又は当該PDSCHから復号されるデータ/情報)に基づいてディスプレイ、スピーカーなどの機器に情報を出力する)出力部と呼ばれてもよい。 The communications module 60 receives various information (traffic information, traffic signal information, vehicle-to-vehicle information, etc.) transmitted from external devices and displays it on the information service unit 59 installed in the vehicle. The information service unit 59 may also be called an output unit that outputs information (for example, outputs information to a device such as a display or speaker based on the PDSCH received by the communications module 60 (or data/information decoded from the PDSCH)).

 また、通信モジュール60は、外部装置から受信した種々の情報をマイクロプロセッサ61によって利用可能なメモリ62へ記憶する。メモリ62に記憶された情報に基づいて、マイクロプロセッサ61が車両40に備えられた駆動部41、操舵部42、アクセルペダル43、ブレーキペダル44、シフトレバー45、左右の前輪46、左右の後輪47、車軸48、各種センサ50-58などの制御を行ってもよい。 Furthermore, the communication module 60 stores various information received from external devices in memory 62 that can be used by the microprocessor 61. Based on the information stored in memory 62, the microprocessor 61 may control the drive unit 41, steering unit 42, accelerator pedal 43, brake pedal 44, shift lever 45, left and right front wheels 46, left and right rear wheels 47, axles 48, various sensors 50-58, and other components provided on the vehicle 40.

 また、本開示における基地局は、ユーザ端末で読み替えてもよい。例えば、基地局及びユーザ端末間の通信を、複数のユーザ端末間の通信(例えば、Device-to-Device(D2D)、Vehicle-to-Everything(V2X)などと呼ばれてもよい)に置き換えた構成について、本開示の各態様/実施形態を適用してもよい。この場合、上述の基地局10が有する機能をユーザ端末20が有する構成としてもよい。また、「上りリンク(uplink)」、「下りリンク(downlink)」などの文言は、端末間通信に対応する文言(例えば、「サイドリンク(sidelink)」)で読み替えられてもよい。例えば、上りリンクチャネル、下りリンクチャネルなどは、サイドリンクチャネルで読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, the base station in the present disclosure may be read as a user terminal. For example, the aspects/embodiments of the present disclosure may be applied to a configuration in which communication between a base station and a user terminal is replaced with communication between multiple user terminals (which may be called, for example, Device-to-Device (D2D) or Vehicle-to-Everything (V2X)). In this case, the user terminal 20 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the base station 10 described above. Furthermore, terms such as "uplink" and "downlink" may be read as terms corresponding to communication between terminals (for example, "sidelink"). For example, terms such as uplink channel and downlink channel may be read as sidelink channel.

 同様に、本開示におけるユーザ端末は、基地局で読み替えてもよい。この場合、上述のユーザ端末20が有する機能を基地局10が有する構成としてもよい。 Similarly, the term "user terminal" in this disclosure may be interpreted as "base station." In this case, the base station 10 may be configured to have the functions possessed by the user terminal 20 described above.

 本開示において、基地局によって行われるとした動作は、場合によってはその上位ノード(upper node)によって行われることもある。基地局を有する1つ又は複数のネットワークノード(network nodes)を含むネットワークにおいて、端末との通信のために行われる様々な動作は、基地局、基地局以外の1つ以上のネットワークノード(例えば、Mobility Management Entity(MME)、Serving-Gateway(S-GW)などが考えられるが、これらに限られない)又はこれらの組み合わせによって行われ得ることは明らかである。 In this disclosure, operations described as being performed by a base station may in some cases also be performed by its upper node. In a network including one or more network nodes having base stations, it is clear that various operations performed for communication with terminals may be performed by the base station, one or more network nodes other than the base station (such as, but not limited to, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving-Gateway (S-GW)), or a combination thereof.

 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は単独で用いてもよいし、組み合わせて用いてもよいし、実行に伴って切り替えて用いてもよい。また、本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態の処理手順、シーケンス、フローチャートなどは、矛盾の無い限り、順序を入れ替えてもよい。例えば、本開示において説明した方法については、例示的な順序を用いて様々なステップの要素を提示しており、提示した特定の順序に限定されない。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be used alone, in combination, or switched between depending on the implementation. Furthermore, the processing procedures, sequences, flowcharts, etc. of each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be rearranged as long as they are consistent. For example, the methods described in this disclosure present various step elements in an exemplary order, and are not limited to the specific order presented.

 本開示において説明した各態様/実施形態は、Long Term Evolution(LTE)、LTE-Advanced(LTE-A)、LTE-Beyond(LTE-B)、SUPER 3G、IMT-Advanced、4th generation mobile communication system(4G)、5th generation mobile communication system(5G)、6th generation mobile communication system(6G)、xth generation mobile communication system(xG(xは、例えば整数、小数))、Future Radio Access(FRA)、New-Radio Access Technology(RAT)、New Radio(NR)、New radio access(NX)、Future generation radio access(FX)、Global System for Mobile communications(GSM(登録商標))、CDMA2000、Ultra Mobile Broadband(UMB)、IEEE 802.11(Wi-Fi(登録商標))、IEEE 802.16(WiMAX(登録商標))、IEEE 802.20、Ultra-WideBand(UWB)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、その他の適切な無線通信方法を利用するシステム、これらに基づいて拡張、修正、作成又は規定された次世代システムなどに適用されてもよい。また、複数のシステムが組み合わされて(例えば、LTE又はLTE-Aと、5Gとの組み合わせなど)適用されてもよい。 Each aspect/embodiment described in this disclosure may be applied to any of the following mobile communication systems: Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), LTE-Beyond (LTE-B), SUPER 3G, IMT-Advanced, 4th generation mobile communication system (4G), 5th generation mobile communication system (5G), 6th generation mobile communication system (6G), xth generation mobile communication system (xG (x is, for example, an integer or decimal number)), Future Radio Access (FRA), New-Radio The present invention may be applied to systems that use Access Technology (RAT), New Radio (NR), New radio access (NX), Future generation radio access (FX), Global System for Mobile communications (GSM (registered trademark)), CDMA2000, Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB), IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX (registered trademark)), IEEE 802.20, Ultra-WideBand (UWB), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or other appropriate wireless communication methods, as well as next-generation systems that are extended, modified, created, or defined based on these. It may also be applied to a combination of multiple systems (for example, a combination of LTE or LTE-A with 5G).

 本開示において使用する「に基づいて」という記載は、別段に明記されていない限り、「のみに基づいて」を意味しない。言い換えれば、「に基づいて」という記載は、「のみに基づいて」と「に少なくとも基づいて」の両方を意味する。 As used in this disclosure, the phrase "based on" does not mean "based only on," unless expressly stated otherwise. In other words, the phrase "based on" means both "based only on" and "based at least on."

 本開示において使用する「第1の」、「第2の」などの呼称を使用した要素へのいかなる参照も、それらの要素の量又は順序を全般的に限定しない。これらの呼称は、2つ以上の要素間を区別する便利な方法として本開示において使用され得る。したがって、第1及び第2の要素の参照は、2つの要素のみが採用され得ること又は何らかの形で第1の要素が第2の要素に先行しなければならないことを意味しない。 As used in this disclosure, any reference to an element using a designation such as "first," "second," etc. does not generally limit the quantity or order of those elements. These designations may be used in this disclosure as a convenient method of distinguishing between two or more elements. Thus, a reference to a first and a second element does not imply that only two elements may be employed or that the first element must in some way precede the second element.

 本開示において使用する「判断(決定)(determining)」という用語は、多種多様な動作を包含する場合がある。例えば、「判断(決定)」は、判定(judging)、計算(calculating)、算出(computing)、処理(processing)、導出(deriving)、調査(investigating)、探索(looking up、search、inquiry)(例えば、テーブル、データベース又は別のデータ構造での探索)、確認(ascertaining)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the term "determining" may encompass a wide variety of actions. For example, "determining" may be considered to be judging, calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up, search, inquiry (e.g., searching in a table, database, or other data structure), ascertaining, etc.

 また、「判断(決定)」は、受信(receiving)(例えば、情報を受信すること)、送信(transmitting)(例えば、情報を送信すること)、入力(input)、出力(output)、アクセス(accessing)(例えば、メモリ中のデータにアクセスすること)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。 Furthermore, "determination" may be considered to be "determining" receiving (e.g., receiving information), transmitting (e.g., sending information), input, output, accessing (e.g., accessing data in memory), etc.

 また、「判断(決定)」は、解決(resolving)、選択(selecting)、選定(choosing)、確立(establishing)、比較(comparing)などを「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。つまり、「判断(決定)」は、何らかの動作を「判断(決定)」することであるとみなされてもよい。本開示において、「判断(決定)」は、上述した動作と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" resolving, selecting, choosing, establishing, comparing, etc. In other words, "judgment (decision)" may be considered to mean "judging (deciding)" some kind of action. In this disclosure, "judgment (decision)" may be read interchangeably with the above-mentioned actions.

 また、本開示において、「判断(決定)(determine/determining)」は、「想定する(assume/assuming)」、「期待する(expect/expecting)」、「みなす(consider/considering)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、本開示において、「...することを想定しない」は、「...しないことを想定する」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。 Furthermore, in this disclosure, "determine/determining" may be interpreted interchangeably as "assume/assuming," "expect/expecting," "consider/considering," etc. Furthermore, in this disclosure, "does not expect to do..." may be interpreted interchangeably as "assumes not to do...."

 本開示において、「期待する(expect)」は、「期待される(be expected)」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。例えば、「...を期待する(expect(s) ...)」(”...”は、例えばthat節、to不定詞などで表現されてもよい)は、「...を期待される(be expected ...)」、「...する(上記”...”がto不定詞の場合はtoを取った動詞)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。「...を期待しない(does not expect ...)」は、「...を期待されない(be not expected ...)」、「...しない(上記”...”がto不定詞の場合はtoを取った動詞)」などと互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、「装置Aは...を期待されない(An apparatus A is not expected ...)」は、「装置A以外の装置Bが、当該装置Aについて...を期待しない」と互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、装置AがUEである場合、装置Bは基地局であってもよい)。 In the present disclosure, "expect" may be interchangeably read as "be expected." For example, "expect(s)..." ("..." may be expressed, for example, as a that clause, a to-infinitive, etc.) may be interchangeably read as "be expected..." or "does... (if the above "..." is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to")." "does not expect..." may be interchangeably read as "be not expected..." or "does not... (if the above "..." is a to-infinitive, a verb with "to")." Furthermore, "An apparatus A is not expected..." may be interchangeably read as "apparatus B other than apparatus A does not expect..." from apparatus A (for example, if apparatus A is a UE, apparatus B may be a base station).

 本開示に記載の「最大送信電力」は送信電力の最大値を意味してもよいし、公称最大送信電力(the nominal UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよいし、定格最大送信電力(the rated UE maximum transmit power)を意味してもよい。 The term "maximum transmit power" used in this disclosure may refer to the maximum value of transmit power, the nominal UE maximum transmit power, or the rated UE maximum transmit power.

 本開示において使用する「接続された(connected)」、「結合された(coupled)」という用語、又はこれらのあらゆる変形は、2又はそれ以上の要素間の直接的又は間接的なあらゆる接続又は結合を意味し、互いに「接続」又は「結合」された2つの要素間に1又はそれ以上の中間要素が存在することを含むことができる。要素間の結合又は接続は、物理的であっても、論理的であっても、あるいはこれらの組み合わせであってもよい。例えば、「接続」は「アクセス」で読み替えられてもよい。 As used in this disclosure, the terms "connected," "coupled," or any variation thereof, mean any direct or indirect connection or coupling between two or more elements, and may include the presence of one or more intermediate elements between two elements that are "connected" or "coupled" to each other. The coupling or connection between elements may be physical, logical, or a combination thereof. For example, "connected" may be read as "access."

 本開示において、2つの要素が接続される場合、1つ以上の電線、ケーブル、プリント電気接続などを用いて、並びにいくつかの非限定的かつ非包括的な例として、無線周波数領域、マイクロ波領域、光(可視及び不可視の両方)領域の波長を有する電磁エネルギーなどを用いて、互いに「接続」又は「結合」されると考えることができる。 For the purposes of this disclosure, when two elements are connected, they may be considered to be "connected" or "coupled" to one another using one or more wires, cables, printed electrical connections, etc., as well as using electromagnetic energy having wavelengths in the radio frequency range, microwave range, light (both visible and invisible) range, etc., as some non-limiting and non-exhaustive examples.

 本開示において、「AとBが異なる」という用語は、「AとBが互いに異なる」ことを意味してもよい。なお、当該用語は、「AとBがそれぞれCと異なる」ことを意味してもよい。「離れる」、「結合される」などの用語も、「異なる」と同様に解釈されてもよい。 In this disclosure, the term "A and B are different" may mean "A and B are different from each other." Note that this term may also mean "A and B are each different from C." Terms such as "separate" and "combined" may also be interpreted in the same way as "different."

 本開示において、「含む(include)」、「含んでいる(including)」及びこれらの変形が使用されている場合、これらの用語は、用語「備える(comprising)」と同様に、包括的であることが意図される。さらに、本開示において使用されている用語「又は(or)」は、排他的論理和ではないことが意図される。 When the terms "include," "including," and variations thereof are used in this disclosure, these terms are intended to be inclusive, similar to the term "comprising." Furthermore, when the term "or" is used in this disclosure, it is not intended to be an exclusive or.

 本開示において、例えば、英語でのa, an及びtheのように、翻訳によって冠詞が追加された場合、本開示は、これらの冠詞の後に続く名詞が複数形であることを含んでもよい。 In this disclosure, where articles are added by translation, such as a, an, and the in English, this disclosure may include the noun following these articles being plural.

 本開示において、「以下」、「未満」、「以上」、「より多い」、「と等しい」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」、などを意味する文言は、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい。また、本開示において、「良い」、「悪い」、「大きい」、「小さい」、「高い」、「低い」、「早い」、「遅い」、「広い」、「狭い」などを意味する文言は、「i番目に」(iは任意の整数)を付けた表現として、原級、比較級及び最上級に限らず互いに読み替えられてもよい(例えば、「最高」は「i番目に最高」と互いに読み替えられてもよい)。 In this disclosure, terms such as "less than or equal to," "less than," "greater than," "more than," "equal to," etc. may be read interchangeably. Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good," "bad," "big," "small," "high," "low," "fast," "slow," "wide," "narrow," etc. may be read interchangeably, not limited to the positive, comparative, and superlative. Furthermore, in this disclosure, terms meaning "good," "bad," "big," "small," "high," "low," "fast," "slow," "wide," "narrow," etc. may be read interchangeably, not limited to the positive, comparative, and superlative, as expressions with the prefix "i-th" (i is any integer) (for example, "highest" may be read interchangeably as "i-th highest").

 本開示において、「の(of)」、「のための(for)」、「に関する(regarding)」、「に関係する(related to)」、「に関連付けられる(associated with)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In this disclosure, the terms "of," "for," "regarding," "related to," "associated with," etc. may be read interchangeably.

 本開示において、「Aのとき(場合)、B(when A, B)」、「(もし)Aならば、B(if A, (then) B)」、「Aの際にB(B upon A)」、「Aに応じてB(B in response to A)」、「Aに基づいてB(B based on A)」、「Aの間B(B during/while A)」、「Aの前にB(B before A)」、「Aにおいて(Aと同時に)B(B at( the same time as)/on A)」、「Aの後にB(B after A)」、「A以来B(B since A)」、「AまでB(B until A)」などは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。なお、ここでのA、Bなどは、文脈に応じて、名詞、動名詞、通常の文章など適宜適当な表現に置き換えられてもよい。なお、AとBの時間差は、ほぼ0(直後又は直前)であってもよい。また、Aが生じる時間には、時間オフセットが適用されてもよい。例えば、「A」は「Aが生じる時間オフセット前/後」と互いに読み替えられてもよい。当該時間オフセット(例えば、1つ以上のシンボル/スロット)は、予め規定されてもよいし、通知される情報に基づいてUEによって特定されてもよい。 In the present disclosure, expressions such as "when A, B," "if A, (then) B," "B upon A," "B in response to A," "B based on A," "B during/while A," "B before A," "B at (the same time as)/on A," "B after A," "B since A," and "B until A" may be interchangeable. Note that A and B may be replaced with other appropriate expressions, such as nouns, gerunds, and regular sentences, depending on the context. The time difference between A and B may be nearly zero (immediately after or immediately before). A time offset may also be applied to the time at which A occurs. For example, "A" may be interpreted interchangeably as "before/after the time offset at which A occurs." The time offset (e.g., one or more symbols/slots) may be predefined or may be determined by the UE based on signaled information.

 本開示において、タイミング、時刻、時間、時間インスタンス、任意の時間単位(例えば、スロット、サブスロット、シンボル、サブフレーム)、期間(period)、機会(occasion)、リソースなどは、互いに読み替えられてもよい。 In the present disclosure, terms such as timing, time, duration, time instance, any time unit (e.g., slot, subslot, symbol, subframe), period, occasion, and resource may be interpreted interchangeably.

 以上、本開示に係る発明について詳細に説明したが、当業者にとっては、本開示に係る発明が本開示中に説明した実施形態に限定されないということは明らかである。本開示の記載は、例示説明を目的とし、本開示に係る発明に対して何ら制限的な意味をもたらさない。 The invention according to the present disclosure has been described in detail above, but it will be clear to those skilled in the art that the invention according to the present disclosure is not limited to the embodiments described herein. The description of the present disclosure is for illustrative purposes only and does not pose any limitations on the invention according to the present disclosure.

Claims (6)

 上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を受信する受信部と、
 指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定する制御部と、
 を有する端末。
A receiving unit that receives setting information of a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) having a specific purpose set for use in UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point;
a control unit that determines an UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction;
A terminal having:
 前記制御部は、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームとして、マクロTRPに対するビームとは異なるビーム、特定の方向に向かうビーム、または、マクロTRPに対するビームとは逆方向へのビームを決定する
 請求項1に記載の端末。
The terminal of claim 1 , wherein the control unit determines a beam different from a beam for a macro TRP, a beam directed in a specific direction, or a beam directed in the opposite direction to the beam for the macro TRP as the UL beam for the UL reception point.
 前記受信部は、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを示す設定を受信し、
 前記制御部は、前記切り替えを示す設定に基づいて、前記ULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施する
 請求項1に記載の端末。
The receiving unit receives a setting indicating switching on or off of UL beam management for the UL reception point;
The terminal according to claim 1 , wherein the control unit switches the UL beam management on and off based on a setting indicating the switching.
 前記制御部は、参照信号の受信結果に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイント用のULビーム管理のオン、オフの切り替えを実施する
 請求項1に記載の端末。
The terminal according to claim 1 , wherein the control unit switches on and off UL beam management for the UL reception point based on a reception result of a reference signal.
 上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を受信する工程と、
 指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームを決定する工程と、
 を有する端末の無線通信方法。
Receiving configuration information of a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) having a specific purpose configured for use in uplink (UL) beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point;
determining an UL beam for the UL reception point based on specified rules or transmitted instructions;
A wireless communication method for a terminal having the above configuration.
 上りリンク(UL)受信ポイントへのULビーム管理に用いられる特定の用途が設定されたSounding Reference Signal(SRS)の設定情報を送信する送信部と、
 指定されたルールまたは送信された指示に基づいて、前記UL受信ポイントに対するULビームが決定されることを想定する制御部と、
 を有する基地局。
A transmitter that transmits setting information of a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) having a specific purpose set for use in UL beam management to an uplink (UL) receiving point;
a control unit that determines an UL beam for the UL reception point based on a specified rule or a transmitted instruction;
A base station having
PCT/JP2024/002480 2024-01-26 2024-01-26 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station Pending WO2025158656A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2024/002480 WO2025158656A1 (en) 2024-01-26 2024-01-26 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2024/002480 WO2025158656A1 (en) 2024-01-26 2024-01-26 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025158656A1 true WO2025158656A1 (en) 2025-07-31

Family

ID=96545061

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2024/002480 Pending WO2025158656A1 (en) 2024-01-26 2024-01-26 Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025158656A1 (en)

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220271890A1 (en) * 2019-08-15 2022-08-25 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. Uplink Beamforming Framework for Advanced 5G Networks

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220271890A1 (en) * 2019-08-15 2022-08-25 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. Uplink Beamforming Framework for Advanced 5G Networks

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BO GAO, ZTE, CHINA TELECOM: "Discussion on enhancements for asymmetric DL sTRP/UL mTRP scenarios", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2400281; TYPE DISCUSSION; NR_MIMO_PH5-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. RAN WG1, 19 February 2024 (2024-02-19), FR, XP052568064 *
ZTE: "Views on MIMO evolution in Rel-19", 3GPP DRAFT; RP-233609, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. TSG RAN, 4 December 2023 (2023-12-04), FR, XP052558341 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2025158656A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025158655A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025177375A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025177376A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025220062A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025203650A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025258043A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025155667A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2025210916A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025210912A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025173102A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025156074A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2025150122A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025150123A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025149789A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
JP2025156204A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2025169357A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025169356A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025155524A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2025169266A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025177348A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
WO2025182798A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025149816A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station
WO2025032760A1 (en) Terminal, wireless communication method, and base station
JP2025155694A (en) Terminal, wireless communication method and base station

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24920206

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1